OWNER'S MANUAL

LED TV

Owner's Record
You will find the model number and serial number on
the back of the TV. Record these numbers in the spaces

32L3300 Series
provided below. Refer to them whenever you call upon
your TOSHIBA dealer regarding this product.

39L3300 Series
Model number:
Serial number:

©2013 TOSHIBA CORPORATION

All Rights Reserved TD/TE VX1A00285300

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 1 2013/09/27 8:23:10

 Welcome to Toshiba
• Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba LED TV. This manual will help you use the exciting features of your
new TV.
• Instructions in this manual are based on using the remote control.
• You also can use the controls on the TV if they have the same name as those referred to on the remote
control.
• Please read all safety and operating instructions in this manual carefully, and keep this manual for future
reference.
• “LED TV” means LCD Panel with LED Backlight.
Contents
Introduction / Getting started
Pedestal stand Assembling ............................... 3
Important Safety Instructions .......................... 4
Connecting an aerial ........................................... 8
Exploring your new TV ........................................ 8
TV panel controls .................................................. 9
Learning about the remote control .............10
Turning the TV on ...............................................11
Tuning the TV for the first time ......................11
Learning about the menu system.................15
Using the Quick Menu ......................................16
Watching TV programmes ...............................16
Using the TV’s features
Picture adjustment .............................................18
Sound adjustment ..............................................21
Other features settings .....................................24
Selecting the external input source
to view ...............................................................26
Setting the Colour System ...............................26
Labelling video input sources ........................26
Channel List ..........................................................26
Teletext ...................................................................27
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 2
Connecting your TV
Back connections ................................................ 29
Connecting HDMI or DVI devices.................. 30
Selecting the PC/HDMI 1 Audio mode........ 31
Setting the HDMI 1 Audio mode ................... 31
Connecting a computer ................................... 31
Using the PC Settings ........................................ 32
Connecting a network ...................................... 33
Setting up the Network .................................... 35
Network Connection Test ................................ 38
Setting the Network Lock ................................ 39
Network PIN Setup ............................................. 39
Using the software keyboard ......................... 39
Using YouTube ..................................................... 40
Using the Screen Mirroring function ........... 40
Using the Media Player ..................................... 41
Software Upgrade .............................................. 46
Reference section
APPENDIX .............................................................. 47
Troubleshooting.................................................. 50
Broadcast system ................................................ 51
Specifications ....................................................... 51
2013/09/27 8:23:10
 Introduction / Getting started
Pedestal stand Assembling
CAUTION: Before beginning pedestal assembly, carefully lay the front of the LCD Panel face down on a flat,
cushioned surface such as a quilt or blanket. Leave the bottom of the unit protruding over the edge of the
surface and assemble as indicated.
NOTE:
Extreme care should always be used when attaching the pedestal stand to avoid damage to the LCD panel.

1 3

2 4

M5 × 2
M4 × 4

Warning: Ensure the power cable is not pinched

when attaching the pedestal stand as this could
cause an electric shock.

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 3 2013/09/27 8:23:10

 Introduction / Getting started
Important Safety Instructions
Be sure to observe the following instructions and
precautions to ensure safe use of this TV.
Installation
1) WARNING: To prevent injury, this apparatus
must be securely attached to the floor/wall in
accordance with the installation instructions.
Install the TV in a horizontal, stable location.
Attach the TV to the stand with the mounting
screw.
• If the TV is not installed securely, it may lean or
fall over and cause an injury.
• To prevent injury, use the exclusive optional
stand or wall-hanging bracket to install this
TV on the floor or wall securely in accordance
with a qualified technician.
Screw hole
Top view
2) Never place the TV in an unstabilized location
such as on a shaky table, incline or location
subject to vibration.
• Only use cabinets or stands recommended by
the TV manufacturer.
• Only use furniture that can safely support the
TV.
• Ensure that the TV is not hanging over the
edge of the supporting furniture.
• Never place the TV on tall furniture (for
example, cupboards or bookcases) without
anchoring both the furniture and the TV to a
suitable support.
• Never stand the TV on cloth or other material
placed between the TV and supporting
furniture.
The TV may drop or fall off, which may cause an
injury or damage.
3) Never stand or climb on the TV.
• Educate children about the dangers of
climbing on furniture to reach the TV or its
controls.
Be especially careful in households with children
to prevent them through climbing on top of
the TV. It may move, fall over, break, become
damaged or cause an injury.
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 4
4) Always connect the power plug to an
appropriate electrical outlet equipped with
110-240V AC, 50/60Hz.
Never use the TV outside the specified voltage
range. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
About the fuse
In a three pin earthing-type, the fuse fitted in
this plug is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
It should only be replaced by a correctly rated
and approved type and the fuse cover must be
refitted.
About the use
• Make sure to insert the plugs firmly, when
plugging the AC power cord into the TV set
end and wall outlet end.
• Make sure to hold the plug, when unplugging
the AC power cord.
• Never use other cord except for supplied AC
power cord, and never use the supplied power
cord for any other purpose.
5) Never insert or remove the power plug with
wet hands.
This may cause an electric shock.
6) Never block or cover the slots and openings in
the cabinet.
• Never place the TV so that it is facing upward
or on its side.
• Never place the TV in a closet, bookcase or
other similar area where the ventilation is
poor.
• Never drape a newspaper, tablecloth or
curtain on the TV.
• When installing the TV against a wall, always
keep the TV at least 10 cm away from the wall.
• Never place the TV on a soft unstable surface,
such as a carpet, or a cushion.
The inside of this TV will overheat if the
ventilation holes are covered, blocked or sealed,
which may result in a fire.
7) Never place the TV near a heater or in direct
sunlight.
The surface of the cabinet or power cord may
melt and result in a fire or an electric shock.
8) Never place the TV in an area exposed to high
humidity levels, such as in a bathroom or
close to a humidifier.
This may cause a fire or an electric shock.
9) Never place the TV next to a stove where it
will be exposed to oil, smoke, or steam, or in
a location where there is a large quantity of
dust.
This may cause a fire or an electric shock.
2013/09/27 8:23:10
 Introduction / Getting started
10) Precautions for moving the TV
• When moving the TV, be sure to remove the
plug from the wall outlet and disconnect the
aerial cable and audio/video cables, any steady
ties and mounting screw. A fire or an electric
shock may result if the power cord is damaged.
• When carrying the TV, at least two people are
needed. Be sure to carry it upright.
• Never carry the TV with the screen facing up or
down.
11) Precautions for installing on outdoor aerial
An outside aerial system should not be located
in the vicinity of overhead power lines, or other
electric light or power circuits.
If the aerial falls down or drops, it may cause an
injury or an electric shock.
Use
1) Never place hot objects or open flame sources,
such as lighted candles or nightlights, on or
close to the TV.
High temperatures can melt plastic and lead to
fires.
2) The apparatus shall not be exposed to
dripping or splashing and that no objects
filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be
placed on the apparatus.
When liquids are spilled or small items are
dropped inside the TV, this may cause a fire or an
electric shock.
If small objects drop inside the TV, turn off the
TV and remove the power plug from the outlet
immediately and contact a service technician.
3) Never insert objects (metal or paper) or pour
water inside the TV through ventilation holes
and other openings.
These items may cause a fire or an electric shock.
If these objects are inserted inside the TV, turn
off the TV and remove the power plug from
the outlet immediately and contact a service
technician. Be especially careful that children do
not insert objects in the TV.
4) When the TV will not be used for a long period
of time, such as during vacation or travel,
remove the power plug from the wall outlet
for safety.
• The TV is not completely disconnected from
the power supply line, as minute current is
consumed even when the 1 Power switch is
turned off.
• The Mains plug or an appliance coupler is
used as the disconnect device, therefore
the disconnect device shall remain readily
operable.
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 5
5) Never pull on the power cord when removing
the plug from the wall outlet.
Always hold the plug firmly when removing it. If
the power cord is yanked, the cord may become
damaged and a fire or an electric shock may
occur.
6) Never cut, break, modify, twist, bunch up
or bent the cord or apply excessive force or
tension to it.
Never place heavy objects on the cord or allow
it to overheat as this may cause damage, a fire or
an electric shock. Contact a service technician if
the power cord is damaged.
7) If there is thunder or lightning, never touch
the aerial cable or other connected cables.
You may suffer an electric shock.
Service
1) Never repair, modify or disassemble the TV by
yourself.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Consult a service technician for inspection and
repairs.
2) When a malfunction occurs, or if smoke or
an unusual odor comes from the TV, turn off
the TV and remove the power plug from the
outlet immediately.
Make sure that the smoke or smell has stopped,
then contact a service technician. If the TV is still
used in this condition, it may cause a fire or an
electric shock.
3) If the TV is dropped or the cabinet is broken,
turn off the TV and remove the power plug
from the outlet immediately.
If the TV has power in this condition, it may cause
a fire or an electric shock. If the cabinet is broken,
be careful when handling the TV to prevent an
injury.
Contact a service technician for inspection and
repair.
4) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life,
ask a qualified service technician to properly
dispose of the TV.
2013/09/27 8:23:11
 Introduction / Getting started
Cleaning
CAUTION: Avoid using chemicals (such as air
refreshers, cleaning agents, etc.) on or near
the TV pedestal. Studies indicate that plastics
may weaken and crack over time from the
combination effects of chemical agents and
mechanical stress (such as weight of TV). Failure
to follow these instructions could result in
serious injury and/or permanent damage to TV
and TV pedestal.
1) Remove the power plug before cleaning.
Never use solvents such as benzine or thinner to
clean the TV.
• These solvents may distort the cabinet or
damage its finish.
• If rubber or vinyl products remain in contact
with the TV for a long time, a stain may result.
If the cabinet becomes dirty, clean it with a soft,
dry cloth.
When cleaning the surface of the LCD display,
wipe the panel surface gently with a soft, dry
cloth.
2) Periodically disconnect the power plug from
the outlet and check it.
If dust has collected on the power plug
connectors, clean off the dust with a dry cloth.
This dust may cause a fire due to reduced
insulation on the plug.
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 6
Important information
1) About LCD screen
• If you have the LCD screen facing to the sun,
the LCD screen will be damaged. Be aware of
locating the TV close to a window or outdoors.
• Never press the LCD screen strongly or scratch
it, and never put anything on it. These actions
will damage the LCD screen.
2) About cabinet and LCD screen
Never spray volatile compounds such as
insecticide on the cabinet and LCD screen.
This may cause a discolouration or damage the
cabinet and LCD screen.
3) About afterimage
If a still picture is displayed, an afterimage may
remain on the screen, however it will disappear.
This is not a sign of malfunction.
4) Some pixels of the screen do not light up
The LCD display panel is manufactured using an
extremely high level of precision technology,
however sometimes some pixels of the screen
may be missing picture elements or have
luminous spots. This is not sign of malfunction.
5) About Interference
The LCD display may cause interference in image,
sound, etc. of other electronic equipment that
receives electromagnetic waves (e.g. AM radios
and video equipment).
6) About using under the low temperature places
If you use the TV in the room of 0°C or less,
the picture brightness may vary until the
LCD monitor warms up. This is not a sign of
malfunction.
7) When disposing of or transferring ownership
of the TV
Before disposing of or transferring ownership
of the TV, perform "Resetting the TV" (- page
25).
2013/09/27 8:23:11
 Introduction / Getting started

Exemptions
• Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused
by fires, natural disaster (such as thunder,
earthquake, etc.), acts by third parties, accidents,
owner’s misuse, or uses in other improper
conditions.
• Toshiba is not liable for incidental damages
(such as profit loss or interruption in business,
modification or erasure of record data, etc.)
caused by use or inability to use of product.
• Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused
by neglect of the instructions described in the
owner’s manual.
• Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused by
misuse or malfunction through simultaneous use
of this product and the connected equipment.

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 7 2013/09/27 8:23:11

 Introduction / Getting started

Connecting an aerial Exploring your new TV

Optimum reception of colour requires a good signal
and will generally mean that an outdoor aerial must Installing the remote control batteries
be used. Remove the battery cover.
The exact type and positioning of the aerial will Insert two R03 (AAA) batteries matching the –/+
depend upon your particular area. polarities of the battery to the –/+ marks inside the
Your Toshiba dealer or service personnel can best battery compartment.
advise you on which aerial to use in your area.
Before connecting the aerial cable, turn off all main
power switches.

VHF and/or UHF aerial

Media Recorder TV back view

IN

OUT
Cautions:
• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.
Batteries must not be exposed to excessive heat such
as sunshine, fire or the like.
Aerial cable • Attention should be drawn to the environmental
(75 7 coaxial) (not supplied) aspects of battery disposal.
300 7 twin-lead feeder • Never mix battery types or combine used batteries
with new ones.
Aerial adaptor NOTE:
75 7
(not supplied) aerial • If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if
terminal the operating range becomes reduced, replace both
75 7 coaxial cable batteries with new ones.
• If the batteries are dead or if you will not use the
remote control for a long time, remove the batteries
Plug 75 7 aerial to prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery
(not supplied) terminal compartment.
Effective range

within 5 m

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 8 2013/09/27 8:23:11

 Introduction / Getting started

TV panel controls 6 o HDMI 2 (input terminals) — High-

Definition Multimedia Interface input receives
• You can operate your TV using the buttons on digital audio and uncompressed digital video
the side panel or the remote control. The back of from an HDMI device (- page 30).
the panel provide the terminal connections to
connect other equipment to your TV TV back view
(- “Connecting your TV” pages 29– 46).
• For the use of each control, see the pages in
brackets.
TV front view

Cable holder*

1 7 8
Left side view LAN

2 (2)

15
VIDEO
VIDEO
PC/HDMI 1 Y
(AUDIO)

3 L/
PB/CB MONO
9
14 AUDIO

4
PR/CR
RGB/PC
R
L/
MONO

DIGITAL
AUDIO AUDIO
10
5 R
COMPONENT/
AUDIO(FIXED)
VIDEO INPUT
(1)

6 13
1 ! (power LED) — Power indicator
(- page 11).
2 ! (power on/standby) — Press to turn the TV
on/ standby (- page 11).
3 2 – + (volume) — These buttons adjust the
volume level.
U u (mode up/down) — These buttons select
programme position or input source.
4 p / o (programme position or input source)
— When external input list is displayed, an
input source can be selected.
5 USB 1-2 (input terminals) — Insert your USB
storage device (photo, movie and music)
(- page 41).
• Connect a USB HDD to the USB 2 port.
• The USB port also has to be used with the
“TOSHIBA Dual Band WLAN Adaptor” (WLM-
40U : not supplied) in order to access a wireless
network. (- page 34).
12 11
Cable holder *
* You can use the cable holder to hold the aerial
cable, video and audio cables etc.
Never grasp the holder when moving the TV.
7 A (aerial input terminal) — Analogue aerial
signal input (- page 8).
8 LAN port — For use when connecting to
network (- page 33).
9 o (2) (video 2 input terminals) — Standard
video and standard stereo audio input. (-
page 29).
10 O AUDIO (output terminals) — Standard
audio outputs (FIXED) (- page 29).
11 o (1) COMPONENT / VIDEO INPUT (input
terminals) — High-definition component video
and standard (analogue) stereo audio inputs, or
standard (composite) video and standard stereo
audio inputs (- page 29).

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 9 2013/09/27 8:23:12

 Introduction / Getting started
12 o HDMI 1 (input terminals) — High- 14 o RGB/PC (input terminal) — For use when
Definition Multimedia Interface input receives connecting a personal computer (PC) (- page
digital audio and uncompressed digital video 31).
from an HDMI device (- page 30). 15 o PC/HDMI 1 (AUDIO) (input terminal) —
13 O DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) (output PC audio input terminal is shared with HDMI
terminal) — For use when connecting an analogue audio input terminal, and their use can
amplifier with optical type digital audio input be configured in the PREFERENCES menu (-
(- page 29). page 31).

Learning about the remote control

1 1 Power on/Standby
2 2 Input source selection (TV, VIDEO or
5 COMPONENT, HDMI, PC)
3
4 6 3 Picture Mode
4 Picture Size
5 Sound Mode
6 Stereo/Bilingual selection
7 7 Number buttons (0-9)
8 To return to the previous programme
9 To display the Channel List
10 Volume – + (These buttons adjust the volume
level.)
8 9
11 • To display on-screen information
11 • Initial/Index function for Teletext
12 Sound Mute (This button turns the sound off/
10 14 on.)
13 Teletext on/Superimpose Teletext/off
14 Programme position U u
13 12
15 To access the Menu
15 16 16 To access the Quick Menu
17 17 • Menu  
• OK
18 To return to the previous menu
18 19 19 EXIT
20 20 Teletext control buttons (Four coloured buttons:
22 Red, Green, Yellow, Blue)
21 21 Subtitle on/off
23 22 Picture still
23 When using the Media Player (
z Z)
When using the Teletext ( )

10

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 10 2013/09/27 8:23:12

 Introduction / Getting started
Turning the TV on
Switching on the TV
Connect the power cord to a wall outlet, the
! power indicator lights in red (standby mode).
1 Press 1 on the remote control or ! on the TV
left side panel, the ! power indicator lights
in green.
NOTE:
If you watch black and white programmes when the
Colour System mode is set to “A” (Automatic), colour
noise may appear on the screen. In this case select the
appropriate Colour System (For the system of each
country or region, refer to pages 14, 51).
Switching off the TV
1 Press 1 on the remote control or ! on the TV
left side panel to switch to the standby mode.
NOTE:
• When the TV will not be used for a long period of
time, such as during vacation or travel, remove the
power plug from the wall outlet.
• The TV will automatically turn off in 15 minutes
based on No Signal Power Down settings (-
page 25) if no signal is detected.
The TV will automatically turn itself off after
approximately 2 hours if you do not operate the TV
after turned on by on timer function.
• If power is cut off while you are viewing the TV,
the Last Mode Memory function turns on the TV
automatically when power is applied again. If power
is going to be off for a long time and you are going
to be away from your TV, unplug the power cord to
prevent the TV from turning on in your absence.
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 11
Tuning the TV for the first time
Before switching on the TV, put your decoder and
media recorder to standby, if they are connected,
and ensure that the aerial is connected. To setup
the TV, use the buttons on the remote control as
detailed on page 10.
1 Press the 1 button. The Quick Setup screen
will appear. This screen will appear the first time
that the TV is switched on.
Quick Setup
Menu Language English
2 Press  or  to select the menu language.
3 Press OK, to display the Location menu.
Press  or  to select Store or Home.
You can select either Home or Store mode.
Home is recommended for normal home use.
Select Store when using a TV for displaying in
a shop, etc.
Location
To use the TV for displaying in a store showroom, please select
[Store]. [Home] mode is recommended for normal use.
Home
Store mode:
• A confirmation menu will appear.
• Intelligent AutoView menu is not available.
4 Press OK to display the Intelligent AutoView
menu (- page 19).
Press  or  to select Yes or No.
Intelligent AutoView
Intelligent AutoView mode automatically adjusts picture
settings to suit ambient light conditions.
Do you wish to enable Intelligent AutoView mode?
No
5 Press OK to display the Network Setup menu.
Press  or  to select Yes or No.
Network Setup
Do you want to configure network setup?
Yes
11
2013/09/27 8:23:13
 Introduction / Getting started

• When using the wired LAN, connect the LAN Easy Setup using PIN (Personal
cable (- page 33). Identification Number) (- page 35)
• When using the wireless LAN, connect the 1 Press  or  to select PIN.
TOSHIBA Dual Band WLAN Adapter (WLM-40U
: not supplied) to the USB port (- page 34) 2 Press  to select Start Scan and press
• When you select No, skip to step 9. OK.
3 Press  or  to select the desired AP
6 Press OK to display the Network Type menu. and press OK.
Press  or  to select Wired or Wireless.
Note:
Network Type Check the Network Name and/or MAC
address on the label of the AP or in the
Please select a network type. manual, and select your AP.
4 When the PIN code window appears,
Wired
enter the displayed PIN into your AP,
and then press Next to continue the
PIN Setup. When a message displays to
NOTE:
report that the setup is complete, press
If the TOSHIBA Dual Band WLAN Adaptor is not
OK.
connected, Network Type screen does not display
and skip to step 7. Assisted Setup (- page 36)
When Wired is selected: 1 Press  or  to select the desired AP
and press OK.
Press OK to display the Advanced Network
Setup menu. Note:
Go to step 7. Check the MAC address on the label of the
AP or in the manual, and select your AP.
When Wireless is selected: 2 Press  or  to select Security Key and
Press OK to display the Wireless Setup menu. press OK.
The Software Keyboard window will
Wireless Setup appear.
Please select a kind of wireless network. 3 Input the Security Key by using the
Software Keyboard (- page 39).
Easy Setup To save your setting, press the BLUE
button.
From the Wireless Setup menu, press  or NOTE:
 to select Easy Setup, Assisted Setup or • The Security Key must adhere to these
Manual Setup, and press OK. conditions:
- AES, TKIP/AES: 8-63 ASCII or 64 Hex
Easy Setup using PBC (Push Button characters
Configuration) (- page 35) - WEP: 5 or 13 ASCII or 10 or 26 Hex
1 Press  or  to select PBC. characters
• There is only one key ID to set for WEP
2 Press  to highlight Start Scan and
encryption.
press OK.
4 Highlight Done and press OK.
3 Following the on-screen instructions,
push the appropriate button on your AP. NOTE:
If Network Name is not displayed, see
4 When a window reporting that the setup
step 4 and 5 in Manual Setup below to set
is complete appears, press OK.
Network Name before pressing Done.

12

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 12 2013/09/27 8:23:13

 Introduction / Getting started

Manual Setup (- page 36)
1 Press  or  to select Network Name
and press OK.
The Software Keyboard window will
appear.
2 Input the Network Name by using the
Software Keyboard (- page 39).
To save your setting, press the BLUE
button.
7 From Advanced Network Setup menu, set
Auto Setup to On or Off , and press  to select
Next.
When the DHCP function of the router
connected with this TV is On, you can set Auto
Setup to On or Off. (This should usually be set
to On.)
Advanced Network Setup
IP Address Setup

3 Press  or  to select Authentication Auto Setup On

and press  or  to select Open IP Address

Subnet Mask
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
System, Shared Key, WPA2/WPA-PSK Default Gateway . . . .
or WPA2-PSK.
4 Press  or  to select Encryption and IP Adress Setup

press  or  to select None, WEP, AES Auto Setup On

Primary DNS Address . . . .
or AES/TKIP. Secondary DNS Address . . . .

NOTE:
MAC Address 00. 11. 22. 33. 44. 55
• Certain encryption types are only
compatible with specific authentication Next

types.
- When Authentication is Open System,
WEP or None is compatible.
- When Authentication is Shared Key,
WEP or None is compatible.
- When Authentication is WPA2/WPA-
PSK, AES or AES/TKIP is compatible.
- When Authentication is WPA2-PSK,
only AES is compatible.
• There is only one key ID to set for WEP
encryption.
5 Press  or  to select Security Key and
press OK.
6 Input the Security Key by using the
Software Keyboard (- page 39).
To save your setting, press the BLUE
button.
When the DHCP function of the router is Off, set
Auto Setup to Off, and set the IP Address DNS
address(es) manually.
8 Press OK, and Network Connection Test will
start.
A message will appear to indicate if the
connection was successful or it could not be
completed.
NOTE:
The result of Network Connection Test does not
always guarantee the connection.
9 Press OK to display the Auto Tuning menu, and
then  or  to select On or Off.
Auto Tuning

NOTE: Auto Signal Booster On

This item is greyed out when Encryption

Start Scan
is None.
7 Highlight Done and press OK.
NOTE: 10 Select Start Scan and press OK to start the
When Encryption is None, a message automatic search.
will appear. Press  or  to select Yes and
press OK. Auto Tuning
Progress Found
1% 0

13

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 13 2013/09/27 8:23:13

 Introduction / Getting started

When the automatic search is completed, G. Channel search operation

the TV will automatically appear the Manual Press  to search up the band or  to search
Tuning menu. down the band.
Use the Manual Tuning operation if desired Press  or  repeatedly until your desired
channels cannot be preset with the Auto channel is displayed.
Tuning or if you would like to preset channels When a station is found, it will be displayed.
to specific position numbers one by one. NEVER PRESS ANY OTHER BUTTONS WHILE
THE SET IS TUNING.
Manual Tuning
Pos. Label H.Manual Fine Tuning
0 Press  or  until better picture and sound
1
are obtained.
2 I. Signal Booster
3
If the receiving signal is weak/strong and the
picture is noisy, the picture may be improved
4
when using this function.
Press the  or  to turn the Signal Booster
11 Press  or  to select the programme position On or Off.
you want to arrange and press OK to display the J. Label
breakdown menu. Station labels appear under the programme
Press  or  to select an item, then press  or position display each time you turn on the TV,
 to select the item as shown below. select a channel, or press .
Manual Tuning To change or create station labels:
Position
1) Press  or  repeatedly to select a
1 B/G A C 1 0 On
character for the first space, then press 
or .
A C E G I
B D F H J
(blank space)
A. Position selection
2) Repeat step 1) to enter the rest of the
B. System (Sound) (- page 51) characters. If you would like a blank space
C. Colour System (- page 51) in the label name, you must choose a blank
space from the list of characters.
A : Automatic (factory set), P : PAL,
S : SECAM, N4 : NTSC 4.43 (MHz), Press OK to store your settings.
N3 : NTSC 3.58 (MHz) NOTE:
If the colour of a certain channel is abnormal, • The Quick Setup, Location, Auto Tuning, Manual
the automatic colour system selection (A) Tuning menu can also be display at any time from
may have malfunctioned, or sound system the SETUP menu.
selection is wrong. In such a case, select • When you preset the channel which sound of
another colour and/or sound system (- broadcast transmission system adopts “M” system
page 51). (- page 51), the sound system may not be tuned
D. Position skip selection correctly if the radio waves transmit badly. At that
Press  or  to turn the position skip option time, preset the channel by Manual Tuning.
on “8” or off “(”. The position will then be
skipped when you select channels with PU
or Pu. The “8” mark will appear beside a
position number when you use the Number
button on the remote control.
E. Signal Class
The channel classification.
F. Channel
The channel number on which a station is
being broadcast.

14

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 14 2013/09/27 8:23:13

 Introduction / Getting started

Learning about the menu system

We suggest you familiarize yourself with the display charts before using the menu system:
• Press MENU to display menu, then press  or  to select main menu headings.
• Press  or  to select an item.
• Press  or  to select or adjust setting.
• Press OK to display the next menu.
Displaying the menu chart
PICTURE

PICTURE
Picture Settings
3D Colour Management
Base Colour Adjustment
Off
PREFERENCES
Active Backlight Control On

PREFERENCES
Network Setup
Teletext Auto
Teletext Language 1
Panel Lock Off
Display Settings
SOUND AV Connection
Energy Saving Settings
Blue Screen On

SOUND
MTS Auto
Dual Dual 1
Balance 0 SETUP
Advanced Sound Settings
Audio Distortion Control On
Dynamic Range Control Off SETUP
Audio Level Offset 0 Menu Language English
SETUP
Spectrum Analyser Auto Tuning
Menu Language English
Manual Tuning
Auto Tuning
Quick Setup
Manual Tuning
Location Home
APPLICATIONS Quick Setup
Software Upgrade
Location Home
Software Licences
Software Licences
System Information
System Information
APPLICATIONS Reset TV
Media Player
YouTube
On Timer
Sleep Timer 00:00

NOTE:
• In the video input mode ( o1, o2 and HDMI), Auto Tuning, Manual Tuning and Quick Setup are not
available.
• If you do not make a selection for a while, the menu display disappears automatically.
• If you want to close the menu display instantly, press EXIT or MENU.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
• In the PC input mode, PC Settings is available in the Display Settings menu (- page 32).
• When you use the colour management function (- page 20), you can select the Base Colour Adjustment
menu.
• When a "TOSHIBA Dual Band WLAN Adaptor" (WLM-40U : not supplied) is connected, Screen Mirroring
appears in the APPLICATIONS menu (- page 40).

15

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 15 2013/09/27 8:23:14

 Introduction / Getting started

Using the Quick Menu Watching TV programmes

Quick Menu helps you access some options quickly,
such as Picture Mode, Media Player etc.
Selecting the menu language
Press QUICK to display the Quick Menu and use  You can select a language for the on-screen display.
or  to select the option.
1 Press MENU, then press  or  to display
Quick Menu SETUP menu.
Media Player 2 Press  or  to select Menu Language.
YouTube
Sleep Timer 00:00
Power Bass Booster Super
Signal Booster On SETUP
Menu Language English
Auto Tuning
NOTE: Manual Tuning
Quick Setup
Quick Menu items are different depending on the Location Home
current mode. Software Upgrade
Software Licences
System Information
Quick menu item Description
Media Player - page 41.
YouTube - page 40. 3 Press  or  to select the desired language.
Screen Mirroring* - page 40.
Sleep Timer - page 24. Changing the position
Power Bass Booster - page 22.
Signal Booster - page 14. 1 Enter the desired position number using the
Interval Time - page 43. Number buttons on the remote control.
Device Information - page 42.
For positions below 10, use 0 and the required
PICTURE - page 18.
number e.g. for position 1.
SOUND - page 21. 2 You can also change the position by using PU
Repeat - pages 44, 46. or Pu.
Wireless Information* - page 37. The position will be displayed on the screen
Information* - page 41. with the Mono/Stereo/Dual audio status.
* Screen Mirroring (- page 40), Wireless NOTE:
Information (- page 37) and Information (- Changing positions between different format channels
page 41) can be selected from the Quick Menu takes several seconds.
when a "TOSHIBA Dual Band WLAN Adaptor"
(WLM-40U : not supplied) is connected.

16

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 16 2013/09/27 8:23:14

 Introduction / Getting started

Switching between two positions Sorting positions

You can switch two positions without entering Ex.: To swap channel ABCD (Prog.1) for channel
actual position number each time. MNOP (Prog.4):

1 Select the first position you want to view. 1 From the SETUP menu, press  or  to select
Manual Tuning menu, and then press OK.
2 Select the second position with the Number
buttons (0-9). 2 Press  or  to select the channel ABCD, then
press .
3 Press . The previous channel will be displayed.
Manual Tuning
Each time you press , the TV will switch back Pos. Label
and forth between the two positions. 0

1 ABCD
Displaying the on-screen information
2 EFGH

1 Press to display the following on-screen 3 IJKL

information. 4 MNOP

5
4 ABCD Stereo 6

The information will disappear in 6 seconds.

• Position or external input mode selected
• Position skip on/off information
• Label (if set)
• Mono/Stereo/Dual audio status
2 To erase the display instantly, press again.
3 Press  to select the new position “4”, then
press .
4 Press  to select the channel MNOP, then press
.
5 Press  to select the new position “1”, then
press .
6 Confirm new Manual Tuning menu.

17

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 17 2013/09/27 8:23:14

 Using the TV’s features
Picture adjustment PC Normal
• Most of the picture controls and functions are Use this setting for PC connected via HDMI or RGB/
available. However, features not available will be PC terminal when receiving PC signal format. This
greyed out. setting will display the image correctly without
distortion or picture clipping.
Selecting the Picture Size
1 Press until the picture size list appears on
the screen, then press  or  to select the
appropriate picture size (or press repeatedly
to select the desired picture size directly).
2 Press OK. PC Wide
Use this setting for PC connected via HDMI or RGB/
Wide PC terminal when receiving PC signal format. This
Use this setting when watching a wide-screen DVD, setting will display the image without picture
widescreen video tape or a 16:9 broadcast (when clipping.
available). Due to the range of wide-screen formats
(16:9, 14:9, 20:9 etc.), you may see bars on the top
and bottom of the screen.

Dot by Dot
“Dot by Dot” is a non-scaling display. Depending on
4:3 the input signal format, the picture is displayed with
Use this setting to view a true 4:3 broadcast. side panels and/or bars at the top and bottom (e.g.
VGA input source).

Super Live
This setting will enlarge a 4:3 image to fit the screen
by stretching the image horizontally and vertically, Normal
holding better proportions at the centre of the Sets the size to full screen without changing the
image. Some distortion may occur. aspect ratio when watching a movie stored on a USB
device.

Native
This setting will display the image correctly without Zoom
distortion or picture clipping. Sets the size to full screen keeping the 21:9
circularity ratio when watching a movie stored on a
USB device.

18

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 18 2013/09/27 8:23:14

 Using the TV’s features

NOTE: 2 Press  or  to select Picture Mode.

• Using the special functions to change the size of
the displayed image (e.g. changing the height/ Picture Settings

width ratio) for the purpose of public display or Picture Mode Standard
commercial gain may infringe on copyright laws. Backlight 70
Contrast 95
• If the aspect ratio of the selected format is different Brightness 50
from the one of the TV transmission or video Colour 50

programme, it can cause a difference in vision. Tint 0

Change to the correct aspect ratio picture size.
• When using the PC connected via HDMI or RGB/
PC terminal, the moving image quality may be
deteriorated.
Using the picture still
• Press to freeze the picture.
Even if an image is frozen on the TV screen, the
pictures are running on the input source. Audio
continues to be output as well.
To return to a moving picture, press again.
(Movin g) ( S till)
Sharpness 0
Contrast Booster Middle
3 Press  or  to select your desier Picture Mode.
NOTE:
• Game mode is available in external input mode
(other than aerial input). When you select Game
mode, suitable widescreen formats will be selected.
• PC mode is available in RGB/PC input mode or HDMI
input mode.
• The Picture Mode you select affects the current
input only. You can select a different Picture Mode
for each input.

Activating the picture preferences

NOTE: You can customise current Picture Mode settings as
If you use this function except for the purpose of your desired. For example, while selecting "Dynamic", if
private viewing and listening, it may infringe the you change the following items, such as Backlight,
copyright protected by the copyright laws. Contrast, Brightness, Colour, Tint, Sharpness, and
the Picture Settings items, your new setting are
Activating the Picture Mode saved for "Dynamic" Picture Mode.
This TV offers the choice of personalising the picture 1 From the Picture Settings menu, press 
style. or  to select either Backlight, Contrast,
Intelligent AutoView, Dynamic, Standard, Mild, Brightness, Colour, Tint or Sharpness.
Movie, Eco Mode, Cricket/Football, Game and PC
are preset options and affect many features/settings 2 Press  or  to adjust the settings as desired.
within the TV.
Setting the Contrast Booster
To use the q button Contrast Booster improves the definition of dark
areas of the picture.
1 Press q to view the different modes
available. 1 From the Picture Settings menu, press  or 
to select Contrast Booster.
To use the Menu
Picture Settings
1 From the PICTURE menu, press  or  to
Picture Mode Standard
select Picture Settings and press OK. Backlight 70
Contrast 95
Brightness 50
Colour 50
PICTURE Tint 0
Picture Settings Sharpness 0
3D Colour Management Off Contrast Booster Middle
Base Colour Adjustment
Active Backlight Control On

2 Press  or  to select Middle, High, Off or

Low.

19

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 19 2013/09/27 8:23:14

 Using the TV’s features
Using the Turbo LED
Turbo LED allows you to adjust zoom up level of
brightness.
1 From the Picture Settings menu, press  or 
to select Turbo LED.
2 Press  or  to select Middle, High, Off or
Low.
Using the Detail Booster
Detail Booster consist of Luster Enhancer
and Super Resolution. The Luster Enhancer
emphasizes the glossiness of picture. The Super
Resolution improves the clarity of picture.
1 From the Picture Settings menu, press  or 
to select Detail Booster and then press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Luster Enhancer.
3 Press  or  to select On or Off.
4 Press  or  to select Super Resolution.
5 Press  or  to select On or Off.
Using the Cinema Mode
This feature will reduce picture blur without
decreasing image brightness or adding flicker.
1 From the Picture Settings menu, press  or 
to select Cinema Mode.
2 Press  or  to select On or Off.
Adjusting the Colour Temperature
Colour Temperature increases the warmth or
coolness of the picture by setting the red, green or
blue tint.
1 From the Picture Settings menu, press  or 
to select Colour Temperature, then press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Cool, Natural, or Warm
to suit your preference.
Colour Temperature
Colour Temperature Cool
Red Level 0
Green Level 0
Blue Level 0
Reset
3 Press  or  to select Red Level, Green Level
or Blue Level, then press  or  to adjust the
setting as required.
20
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 20
Resetting the Colour Temperature
This function resets your colour temparature
settings to the factory settings.
1 From the Colour Temperature menu, press 
or  to select Reset, then press OK.
2 A confirmation message will appear. Press  or
 to select Yes, and then press OK.
Activating the Noise Reduction (NR)
If the receiving signal of MPEG is a mosquito
(grained) noise depending on the compression and
conversion, the picture is weak and the picture is
blurry, the picture may be improved when using this
function.
1 From the Picture Settings menu, press  or 
to select Noise Reduction, and then press OK.
Noise Reduction
Auto Clean 2 On
MPEG NR
DNR
Auto
Auto
2 Select Auto Clean 2, and then press  or  to
select On or Off.
Off mode :
MPEG NR menu and DNR menu are available.
• MPEG NR mode: Low, Middle, High or Off
• DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) mode: Low,
Middle, High or Off
Resetting the Picture Settings
This feature resets the Picture Settings to the
factory settings.
NOTE:
If no picture settings have been changed, Reset is not
available.
1 From the Picture Settings menu, press  or 
to select Reset, and then press OK.
2 A confirmation message will appear. Press  or
 to select Yes, and then press OK.
Adjusting the Colour Management
You can adjust the picture colour quality by
selecting from 6 base colour adjustments : Red,
Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta or Cyan.
1 From the PICTURE menu, press  or  to
select 3D Colour Management.
2 Press  or  to select On.
3D Colour Management On
2013/09/27 8:23:15
 Using the TV’s features

3 Press  or  to select Base Colour Sound adjustment

Adjustment.
4 Press OK, then press  or  to select an item Setting the MTS (Multi-channel TV Sound)
you want to adjust.
Auto mode
Base Colour Adjustment
The MTS Auto mode automatically recognize stereo/
Hue Saturation Brightness bilingual programmes depending on the broadcast
Red 0 0 0
Green 0 0 0
signal.
Blue
Yellow
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 Press MENU, and then press  or  to display
Magenta 0 0 0 the SOUND menu.
Cyan 0 0 0
Reset

SOUND

5 Press , then press  or  to select Hue, MTS

Dual
Auto
Dual 1
Saturation or Brightness. Balance 0
Advanced Sound Settings
6 Press  or  to adjust the settings as required. Audio Distortion Control On
Dynamic Range Control Off
Hue Saturation Brightness Audio Level Offset 0
Spectrum Analyser
Red 0 0 0

2 Press  or  to select MTS, and then press 

NOTE:
If you select 3D Colour Management Off mode, this
mode is not available.
Resetting the Base Colour Adjustment
The reset function adjusts the base colour
adjustment to the factory settings.
1 From the Base Colour Adjustment menu, press
 or  to select Reset.
2 Press OK.
3 A confirmation message will appear. Press  or
 to select Yes, and then press OK.
Using the Active Backlight Control
In order to improve screen visibility, the Active
Backlight Control sets the screen brightness
automatically during dark scenes.
or  to select Auto or Mono.
Mono mode
If you experience noise or poor reception of any
stereo/bilingual programme, set the MTS mode to
Mono.
Noise will be reduced and reception may improve.
NOTE:
If you experience noise with a particular programme
on whose channel reception is usually good, try setting
MTS mode to Auto, then press s to switch to e
Mono (monaural).
Selecting the Dual 1 or Dual 2 mode
You can hear only Dual 1 or Dual 2 sound selected,
whenever bilingual programmes are received.
1 From the SOUND menu, press  or  to select
Dual.

1 From the PICTURE menu, press  or  to 2 Press  or  to select Dual 1 or Dual 2.

select Active Backlight Control. NOTE:
• When the MTS setting is in Mono mode, the Dual
2 Press  or  to select On or Off. menu is not selectable.
• The Dual menu setting status remains even if the TV
is turned off.

21

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 21 2013/09/27 8:23:15

 Using the TV’s features

Selecting the stereo programmes Using the Sound Mode

1 When a stereo programme is received, Choose your preferred Sound Mode (Dynamic,
d Stereo appears. Natural or Clear Voice).
To use the button
4 ABCD Stereo
1 Press to view the different modes available.
To use the Menu
2 Press s to select the stereo/monaural mode.
d Stereo and e Mono appear cyclically on 1 From the SOUND menu, press  or  to select
the screen. the Advanced Sound Settings and then press
OK.
Selecting the bilingual programmes
2 Press  or  to select the Sound Mode.
1 When a bilingual programme is received, Advanced Sound Settings
j Dual appears.
Sound Mode Dynamic
2 Press s to select the sound to be heard. The Bass
Treble
20
20
sound differs according to the transmission Surround On
system: NICAM or German stereo/bilingual Power Bass Booster Super
broadcast. Reset

Sound to be heard
Display
3 Press  or  to select Dynamic, Natural or
German stereo/ Clear Voice.
NICAM
bilingual broadcast
j Dual 1 Sub I sound Main sound Adjusting the sound quality
J Dual 2 Sub II sound Sub sound You can adjust the basic sound quality.
e Mono Main sound — 1 From the Advanced Sound Settings menu,
press  or  to select Bass or Treble.
NOTE:
These settings are not stored in the TV memory. 2 Press  or  to adjust the settings as desired.

Selecting the monaural programmes Using the Surround

If sound distortion, interruptions or silence arises in Surround help to create rich and wider sound from
the low sound volume level, setting the e Mono 2 stereo sound sources.
mode will mitigate the problem.
1 From the Advanced Sound Settings menu,
1 When a monaural programme is received, e press  or  to select Surround.
Mono appears.
2 Press  or  to select On or Off.
2 Press s to select a monaural mode that is
easy to hear. e Mono 1 and e Mono 2 appear Using the Power Bass Booster
cyclically to the screen.
Power Bass Booster helps to create rich bass.
NOTE:
On some cases, the reception of stereo/bilingual 1 From the Advanced Sound Settings menu,
broadcasts may not be possible after switching on the press  or  to select Power Bass Booster.
e Mono 2 mode. 2 Press  or  to select Normal, Super or Off.
Adjusting the sound balance
1 From the SOUND menu, press  or  to select
the Balance.
2 Press  or  to adjust the settings as desired.

22

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 22 2013/09/27 8:23:15

 Using the TV’s features

Resetting the Advanced Sound Settings Using the Spectrum Analyser

This feature resets the Advanced Sound Settings Shows sound in a visual format.
to the factory settings.
1 From the SOUND menu, press  or  to select
NOTE: the Spectrum Analyser, and then press OK.
If no sound settings have been changed, Reset is not
available. NOTE:
The Spectrum Analyser display turns off when any
1 From the Advanced Sound Settings menu, other procedure is performed.
press  or  to select Reset, and then press
OK. Setting the Digital Audio Output
2 A confirmation message will appear. Press  or 1 Press MENU, and then press  or  to display
 to select Yes, and then press OK. the PREFERENCES menu.
Using the Audio Distortion Control 2 Press  or  to select AV Connection and
press OK.
Prevents audio distortion.
1 From the SOUND menu, press  or  to select
the Audio Distortion Control. PREFERENCES
Network Setup
Teletext Auto
Teletext Language 1
Panel Lock Off
SOUND
Display Settings
MTS Auto
AV Connection
Dual Dual 1
0 Energy Saving Settings
Balance
Blue Screen On
Advanced Sound Settings
Audio Distortion Control On
Dynamic Range Control Off
Audio Level Offset
Spectrum Analyser
0
3 Press  or  to select Digital Audio Output.
AV Connection

2 Press  or  to select On or Off. Input Labelling

PC/HDMI 1 Audio PC
HDMI 1 Audio Digital
Using the Dynamic Range Control Digital Audio Output Auto

This feature allows control of compression for Dolby

Digital.
1 From the SOUND menu, press  or  to select
the Dynamic Range Control.
2 Press  or  to select On or Off.
Using the Audio Level Offset
Sometimes there can be large changes in volume
when switching from an ATV channel or an external
input. Using this feature reduces these volume
differences.
1 From the SOUND menu, press  or  to select
the Audio Level Offset.
2 Press  or  to adjust the settings as desired.
4 Press  or  to select Auto or PCM.
• Auto: This mode automatically outputs in
Dolby Digital format (for Dolby Digital
audio signals) or PCM format (for PCM
audio signals) from an HDMI or USB
device to the digital audio output
socket.
• PCM: Select this when a 2ch digital stereo
amplifier is connected to the TV. When
you select a Dolby Digital or MPEG
audio track, the sound is converted to
the PCM (2ch) format and output.

23

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 23 2013/09/27 8:23:15

 Using the TV’s features
Other features settings
Setting the On Timer menu
The feature allows you to set the TV to turn on
automatically to a preset position or input.
1 From the APPLICATIONS menu, press  to
select On Timer, and then press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Enable On Timer, and
then press  or  to select On.
On Timer
Enable On Timer On
Input TV
Position 1 step 2.
Volume 30
Time Until Power On 00:10
Done
3 Press  or  to go through the list adding the
details of the on timer by using the Number
buttons and  or  to make selections and
press OK.
Input: Select a video input source (TV, EXT 1,
EXT 2, HDMI 1, HDMI 2 or PC).
Position: Set the position that will be tuned
when the TV turns on.
Volume: Select the volume level that will be set
when the TV turns on.
Time Until Power On: Set the amount of
time from now until the TV turns on using the
Number buttons (maximum of 12 hours).
• Alternatively, press  or  to adjust the time
in blocks of 10 minutes up to 12 hours.
4 When all the details have been entered, select
Done and press OK to start the timer.
To cancel the On Timer
1 From the On Timer menu, select Enable On
Timer.
2 Press  or  to select Off, and then select
Done and press OK.
NOTE:
The TV will automatically turn itself off after
approximately 2 hours if you do not operate the TV
after turned on by on timer function.
24
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 24
Setting the Sleep Timer
The Sleep Timer is especially useful if you want the
TV to turn itself off after a selected period of time.
1 From the APPLICATIONS menu, press  to
select Sleep Timer.
2 Press the Number buttons (0-9) to enter
the amount of time until the TV turns off.
Alternatively, press  or  to adjust the time in
blocks of 10 minutes up to 12 hours.
3 Press EXIT to start the timer.
To cancel the Sleep Timer, enter all zeros for the
Using the Auto Format
When the TV receives a true HDMI signal picture
and the Auto Format is On, it will automatically be
displayed in HDMI signal format, irrespective of the
TV’s previous setting.
1 From the Display Settings in the
PREFERENCES menu, press  or  to select
Auto Format.
Display Settings
Auto Format On
4:3 Stretch Off
PC Settings
2 Press  or  to select On or Off.
Activating Blue Screen
When Blue Screen is set to On, the screen will turn
blue and the sound will be muted when no signal is
received.
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, press  or  to
until Blue Screen is selected.
2 Press  or  to select On or Off.
NOTE:
Some external inputs may not mute the sound.
Activating the 4:3 Stretch
When 4:3 stretch is activated, this function will
switch 4:3 format programmes into a full screen
picture.
1 From the Display Settings menu, press  or 
to select 4:3 Stretch.
2 Press  or  to select On or Off.
2013/09/27 8:23:16
 Using the TV’s features

NOTE:
This feature is not available when Auto Format is set
to Off.
Panel Lock
Panel Lock disables the buttons on the TV. All
buttons on the remote control can still be used.
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, press  or  to
select Panel Lock.
2 Press  or  to select On or Off.
NOTE:
When Panel Lock is On, a reminder will appear when
the keys on the TV are touched. If the standby key is
touched, the TV will switch off and can only be brought
out of standby by using the remote control.
Setting the Automatic Power Down
The TV will automatically turn itself off (standby)
after approximately 4 hours, if you do not operate
the control buttons on the remote control or on the
TV control panel.
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, press  or 
until Energy Saving Settings is selected, and
then press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Automatic Power
Down, press  or  to select On or Off, and
then press EXIT.
NOTE:
1 minute before switching to standby, a warning
message will appear.
NOTE:
• Default setting is all On.
• A warning message will appear 1 minute before
turning off.
Viewing the Software Licences
The licences for the software used in this TV are
available for viewing on screen.
1 From the SETUP menu, press  or  to select
Software Licences.
2 Press OK.
A screen will appear displaying all of the
licencing information required for the TV’s
software.
Confirming software version
1 From the SETUP menu, press  or  to select
System Information and then press OK.
2 Press OK to display the software version.
NOTE:
The software version displayed is just for the
illustration.
Resetting the TV
Reset TV will reset all TV settings, including stored
channels, to their original factory values.
1 From the SETUP menu, press  or  to select
Reset TV.

Setting the No Signal Power Down

SETUP
Auto Tuning
The TV will automatically turn itself off after 15 Manual Tuning
minutes when no signal is detected. You can change Quick Setup
the setting to Off for the following purposes: Location Home
Software Upgrade
• Low signal strength of analog channel (no signal
Software Licences
detection). System Information
• Only Audio L/R is connected to an external Reset TV

input in order to listen to music through the TV

speakers.
2 Press OK to select.
1 From the Energy Saving Settings menu, press
OK.
2 Press  or  to select No Signal Power Down
and press OK.
3 Press  or  to select the item you want to
change and press  or  to select On or Off.
A screen will appear warning that all settings
will be lost. Select Yes, and then press OK to
continue.
When the set powers back on, the first time
screen will appear (- page 11). Press OK
to continue, and proceed to the Auto Tuning
menu.
If Network PIN code has been set, the PIN input
screen will appear (- page 39).

25

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 25 2013/09/27 8:23:16

 Using the TV’s features

Selecting the external input source to view Labelling video input sources
1 Press o on the remote control until the These input labels are shown in the input selector.
external input mode list appears on the screen, You can label external inputs according to the
then press ,  or o to select appropriate devices you have connected to the TV.
input source (or press p / o and U or u on 1 From the PREFERENCES menu, press  or 
the TV left side panel to select required input to select AV Connection and press OK.
source directly).
2 Press  or  to select Input Labelling and
Inputs press OK.
TV
VIDEO1 Input Labelling
VIDEO2 Input Label
HDMI 1 EXT 1 --
HDMI 2 EXT 2 --
PC HDMI 1 --
HDMI 2 --
PC --

2 Press OK.
VIDEO1 (o (1), COMPONENT/VIDEO INPUT, 3 Press  or  to select the item you want to
standard or component video input) , label and press  or  to select --, Amplifier,
VIDEO2 (o (2), standard video input), Cable, DVD, Game, PC, Recorder, Satellite or
HDMI1, HDMI2 (HDMI input), VCR, or press the RED button to turn on the
PC (o RGB/PC, PC input) skip.
4 Repeat step 3 for other video inputs.
Setting the Colour System
This feature is available in Standard video Channel List
(composite) inputs mode.
1 Press LIST. The Channel List will appear.
1 Press MENU, and then press  or  to display
Channel List
the SETUP menu.
1
2
3
4
SETUP
Menu Language English 5
Auto Tuning 6
Manual Tuning 7
Colour System Auto 8
Quick Setup
Location Home
Software Upgrade
Software Licences
2 Press  or  to select a channel, and then
press OK.

2 Press  or  to select Colour System, and

then press  or  to select Auto, PAL, SECAM,
NTSC 4.43 or NTSC 3.58.
3 Press OK to store your settings.
NOTE:
Confirm that Colour System is set to “Auto”. If not,
select “Auto” with  or .

26

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 26 2013/09/27 8:23:16

 Using the TV’s features
Teletext
This TV has a multi-page Teletext memory, which
takes a few moments to load and it offers two
ways of viewing Teletext Auto and List which are
explained below.
Setting up the Teletext mode
To select a language for Teletext:
The language 1-4 option enables the display of
different language when using Teletext.
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, and then press
 or  to select Teletext Language.
2 Press  or  to select the required language.
• Language 1: English, German, Dutch,
Flemish, Russian, Bulgarian, Ukranian, Lettish,
Lithuanian, Czech, Slovak, Estonian
• Language 2: Polish, German, Dutch, Flemish,
Estonian, Lettish, Lithuanian, French, Serbian,
Croatian, Slovenian, Czech, Slovak, Rumanian
• Language 3: English, French, Hebrew, Turkish,
Arabic
• Language 4: English, French, Hebrew, Turkish,
Farsi (Iranian/Persian)
To select Teletext mode:
Select a channel position with the desired Teletext
service.
1 From PREFERENCES menu, press  or  to
select Teletext.
2 Press  or  to select Auto or List mode.
NOTE:
• It may take a few moments for the multi-page
teletext memory to load.
• You must exit teletext mode in order to display the
main menu.
Teletext general information
TEXT button:
Pressing TEXT once will bring up the teletext screen.
Press again to superimpose the teletext over a
normal broadcast picture. Press again to return
to normal TV mode. You need to return to normal
viewing if you wish to change channels.
When you first press TEXT to access the text service,
the first page you see will be the initial page.
In Auto mode, this displays the main subjects
available and their relevant page numbers.
In List mode, you will see the page numbers
currently stored on the each colour button.
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 27
Sub-pages:
Once in this chosen page, if there are sub-pages
they will automatically load into memory without
changing the one you are reading. If there are many
sub-pages, it will take a long time for them all to
load and this will depend on the speed with which
the broadcaster transmits them.
To access the sub-pages in memory, press  or 
to view them.
Using Subtitles
1 Press SUBTITLE on the remote control to while
the teletext screen is displayed to display
subtitles. While the subtitles are displayed, press
SUBTITLE again to change the setting.
Using Auto mode
There are two Modes: Auto will display FASTEXT, if
available. List will display your four favorite pages.
In either mode, as an alternative to the coloured
buttons, you can access a page by entering a 3-digit
number, using the Number buttons on the remote
control, or to advance to the next page, press PU, to
go back to the previous page press Pu. To change
between Auto and List, see above.
• Press TEXT to access teletext.
100 Spor t 14:57:55
Football Baseball Racing Swimming
Green Blue
Red Yellow
If FASTEXT is available, you will see 4 coloured titles
at the base of the TV screen. To access any given
subject, simply press the relevant coloured button
on the remote control.
If FASTEXT is not available, you can access any
page simply by entering a 3-digit page number or
pressing the corresponding coloured button.
For further information on your particular text
system(s), see the broadcast teletext index page or
consult your local Toshiba dealer.
27
2013/09/27 8:23:16
 Using the TV’s features

Using List mode To reveal concealed text:

Some pages cover topics such as quizzes and jokes.
1 Press TEXT to access teletext. To discover the solutions, press .
100 TEXT M00 14:58:55
To hold a wanted page:
This function is included as it is part of the broadcast
teletext system but you will not need it as this TV
allows you to control the display of sub-pages.
100 101 102 103
To enlarge the teletext display size:
Green Blue Press once to enlarge the top half of the page,
Red Yellow press again to enlarge the bottom half of the page.
Press again to revert to the normal size.
The four choices at the bottom of the screen are
now number – 100, 101, 102 and 103, which To select a page while viewing a normal picture:
have been programmed into the TV’s memory. When in teletext mode, if a page selection is made
and then is pressed, a normal picture will be
2 To view these pages, use the coloured prompt
displayed. The TV will indicate when the page is
buttons.
present by displaying the title bar of the text page at
e.g. press the Green button to view page 101.
the top of the screen. Press to view the page.
3 If you want to change these stored pages, press NOTE:
the coloured button for the colour you want to It will not be possible to change programme position
change. while in Teletext mode, you will have to cancel the
e.g. Press the Green button and enter the 3-digit teletext first by pressing TEXT to return to a normal TV
number. picture.
101 TEXT M00 14:58:59
To select the time display:
If you press while watching a normal TV
broadcast, you will see a time display from the
broadcaster. It will remain on the screen for about 5
seconds.
100 101 102 103
9:56 and 25 seconds p.m.
21:56:25
This number will change and blinking.
4 Press OK to store your choice.
5 You may view other pages by simply entering
the 3-digit page number – but NEVER press OK
or you will lose the favorite already stored.

Teletext buttons on the remote control

Below is an introduction to the teletext buttons on
your remote control and their functions.
To display a page of teletext:
Press TEXT to display teletext. Press again to
superimpose the teletext over a normal broadcast
picture. Press again to return to normal TV mode.
To display an index/initial page:
In Auto-mode
Press to access the index page. The one displayed
is dependant on the broadcaster.
In List-mode
Press to return to the 100 page or initial page.

28

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 28 2013/09/27 8:23:16

 Connecting your TV
Back connections Connecting an audio system
You can enjoy high quality dynamic sound by
Connection example connecting the TV to an audio system.
NOTE:
TV back view • DO NOT connect the DIGITAL AUDIO output
terminal to the AC-3 RF input of a Dolby Digital
VIDEO (2)
Receiver with a built-in Dolby Digital decoder.
DVD video player Y
VIDEO

(with component L/
• Connect the DIGITAL AUDIO output terminal to the
video outputs)
PB/CB MONO
OPTICAL input of a receiver or processor.
or PR/CR AUDIO • Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected
L/
MONO
R equipment as well.
• When you connect the TV to other equipment, be
AUDIO
Audio system sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the
R
COMPONENT/
equipment from the wall outlet before making any
VIDEO INPUT AUDIO(FIXED)
(1)
connections.
Set Top Box • The output sound of the TV has a wide dynamic
or range. Be sure to adjust the audio amplifier’s volume
to a moderate listening level before turning on the
power. Otherwise, the speakers and your hearing
VCR (Normal)
may be damaged by sudden high volume audio.
• Turn off the amplifier before you connect or
• Before connecting any external equipment, turn disconnect the TV’s power cord. If you leave the
off all main power switches. amplifier power on, the speakers may be damaged.
• The unauthorized recording of TV programmes, Warning:
DVDs, video tapes and other materials may When you are connecting (via the DIGITAL AUDIO
infringe upon the provisions of copyright law. output terminal) an AV decoder that does not have
• The COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT consists of three Dolby Digital decoding function, be sure to set PCM
component video signals (Y, PB/CB, PR/CR) and for Digital Audio Output menu (- page 23).
provides the best picture performance. These Otherwise, the speakers and your hearing may be
terminals can only be used with the component damaged by sudden high volume audio.
video compatible equipment e.g. DVD video
player, etc. Connecting an amplifier equipped with a Dolby Digital
• If you connect to COMPONENT VIDEO for the decoder
COMPONENT / VIDEO INPUT terminals, screen
display will appear changes to COMPONENT.
• Additional equipment and cables shown are not Amplifier equipped with
Dolby Digital decoder
supplied with this TV.
NOTE: To Optical type
o (1) COMPONENT / VIDEO INPUT terminals digital audio input
Optical digital cable
Standard mode Component mode (not supplied)
VIDEO VIDEO
Y Y
Green
To Digital Audio
Yellow
PB/CB PB/CB DIGITAL output terminal
AUDIO
Blue TV back view
PR/CR PR/CR

Red
L/ L/
MONO MONO
White White
AUDIO AUDIO Front speaker Surround speaker Sub woofer
Red Red Centre speaker Signal flow
R R (Audio)
COMPONENT/ COMPONENT/
VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT
(1) (1)
You can enjoy dynamic realistic sound by
connecting the TV to an amplifier equipped with a
Dolby Digital decoder or Dolby Digital processor.
When using this setup, select Auto in the Digital
Audio Output menu (- page 23).

29

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 29 2013/09/27 8:23:16

 Connecting your TV

Connecting an amplifier equipped with a digital audio • HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface
(optical) input • HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection
• CEA-861-D compliance covers the transmission of
uncompressed digital video with high-bandwidth
Amplifier equipped with digital content protection, which is being
digital audio input
standardized for reception of high-definition
To Optical type video signals. Because this is an evolving
digital audio input technology, it is possible that some devices may
not operate properly with the TV.
Optical digital cable • Acceptable PC signal format:
(not supplied)
• S-VGA: VESA 800 5 600 @ 56/60/72/75 Hz
To Digital Audio • XGA: VESA 1024 5 768 @ 60/70/75 Hz
DIGITAL
AUDIO output terminal • W-XGA: VESA 1280 5 768 @ 60/75 Hz
TV back view • W-XGA: VESA 1360 5 768 @ 60 Hz
• S-XGA: VESA 1280 5 1024 @ 60 Hz
However, these signal formats are converted to
Front speaker Signal flow match the number of pixels of the LCD panel.
Therefore, the TV may not display small text
You can enjoy the dynamic sound of a 2-channel properly.
digital stereo by connecting the TV to an amplifier If you connect this unit to your PC, the compressed
equipped with a digital audio (optical) input and image is displayed in S-XGA mode, therefore the
speaker system (right and left front speakers). When picture quality may deteriorate and characters may
using this setup, select PCM in the Digital Audio not be read.
Output menu (- page 23). • L-PCM: Linear-Pulse Code Modulation
• Supported Audio format: L-PCM, Dolby Digital
Connecting HDMI or DVI devices sample rate 32/44,1/48 kHz
• When turning on your electronic components,
turn on the TV first, and then the HDMI and DVI
Connecting an HDMI device
device. One HDMI cable (type A connector)
• When turning off your electronic components, For proper operation, it is recommended that you
turn off the HDMI and DVI device first, and then use a short HDMI cable.
the TV. HDMI cable transfers both video and audio.
• This TV may not be compatible with features and/
or specifications that may be added in the future. TV side view
• This TV is only operable with L-PCM and Dolby
Digital on 32/44.1/48 kHz. If there is no sound TV back view
when using HDMI, use the analogue audio cables
to connect the TV and the HDMI device, and
select Analogue in HDMI 1 Audio of the AV
Connection menu (- page 31).
• This TV is able to connect with HDMI devices. But
it is possible that some HDMI devices may not
operate properly with this TV. HDMI device
Connecting HDMI or DVI devices VIDE O
L
AUDIO
R
IN
HD MI OU T
The HDMI input on your TV receives digital audio OUT

and uncompressed digital video from an HDMI and

uncompressed digital video from a DVI device.
This input is designed to accept HDCP programme
material in digital from CEA-861-D compliant
consumer electronic devices (such as a set top box
and DVD player with HDMI and DVI output).
The HDMI input is designed for best performance
with 1080i (50/60 Hz) and 1080p (24/50/60 Hz) high-
definition video signals, but will also accept and
display 480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, and 720p (50/60 Hz)
and VGA (VESA 640 × 480 @ 60/72/75 Hz) signals.
30

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 30 2013/09/27 8:23:17

 Connecting your TV

Connecting a DVI device Setting the HDMI 1 Audio mode

One HDMI (type A connector)-to-DVI adapter cable You can select sound of an HDMI or DVI device
and audio cables. connected to the HDMI input terminals from three
modes:
HDMI (type A connector)-to-DVI adapter cable Auto, Digital or Analogue.
For proper operation, the length of an HDMI-to- NOTE:
DVI adapter cable should not exceed 3 m. The This function is available only when the PC/HDMI 1
recommended length is 2 m. Audio mode is set to HDMI1.
Standard analogue audio cables 1 From the AV Connection menu, press  or 
An HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable transfers only video. to select HDMI 1 Audio.
Separate analogue audio cables are required. 2 Press  or  to select Auto, Digital or
Analogue.
TV back view PC/HDMI 1
(AUDIO)

Connecting a computer
To connect a PC to the RGB/PC terminal on the TV:
An analogue RGB (15 pin) computer cable can be
connected.

TV back view
PC/HDMI 1
(AUDIO)

DVI device
VIDEO AUDIO DVI
L R OUT
RGB/PC
IN

OUT
Audio cable
for PC-to-TV
connection

Selecting the PC/HDMI 1 Audio mode

You can select PC audio or HDMI audio when using
Mini D-sub
this function. 15 pin
1 From the PREFERENCES menu and press  or
 to select AV Connection Computer
Conversion RGB PC cable
2 Press OK to display the AV Connection menu. adapter
(if necessary)
AV Connection

Input Labelling
Connect a PC cable from the computer to the
PC/HDMI 1 Audio PC o RGB/PC terminal on the back of the TV.
HDMI 1 Audio Digital
Digital Audio Output Auto The following signals can be displayed:
VGA: VESA 640 x 480 @ 60/72/75 Hz
S-VGA: VESA 800 x 600 @ 56/60/72/75 Hz
3 Press  or  to select PC/HDMI 1 Audio and
XGA: VESA 1024 x 768 @ 60/70/75 Hz
press  or  to select PC or HDMI1.
W-XGA: VESA 1280 x 768 @ 60/75 Hz
W-XGA: 1280 x 800 @ 60/75 Hz
W-XGA: VESA 1360 x 768 @ 60 Hz
W-XGA+: 1440 x 900 @ 60 Hz
S-XGA: VESA 1280 x 1024 @ 60 Hz
1920 x 1080p @ 60 Hz (Horizontal Frequency: 67.5
kHz (H), Pixel Clock Frequency: 148.5 MHz)

31

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 31 2013/09/27 8:23:17

 Connecting your TV

NOTE: Signal names for mini D-sub 15 pin connector

• Some PC models cannot be connected to this TV.
• If connecting a certain PC model that signal is Pin assignment for RGB/PC terminal
particular, the PC signal may not be detected
correctly.
• There is no need to use an adapter for computers
with DOS/V compatible mini D-sub 15 pin terminal.
• A bar may appear in the upper, lower, right or left Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
side of the screen, or parts of the picture may be 1 R 9 NC
obscured depending on some signals. This is not the
malfunction. 2 G 10 Ground
• If the edges of the picture are stretched, readjust the
picture position adjustments in the PC Settings 3 B 11 NC
menu. NC (not DDC Data
• Depending on the specification of the PC you are 4 connected) 12
playing the DVD-Video on, and the DVD’s title, some
scenes may be skipped, or you may not be able to 5 Ground 13 H-sync
pause during multi-angle scenes. 6 Ground 14 V-sync
To connect a PC to the HDMI terminal on the TV: 7 Ground 15 DDC Clock
When connecting a PC to the HDMI terminal on the
8 Ground
TV, use an HDMI-to DVI adapter cable and analogue
audio cables.
If connecting a PC with an HDMI terminal, use an Using the PC Settings
HDMI cable (type A connector). Separate analogue
audio cables are not necessary. • First press o until the external input mode list
appears on the screen, then press  or  and
OK in order to select the PC input mode (- page
PC/HDMI 1
(AUDIO) 26).
• This function may not be available for some signal
or if no signal is received.
• The optimum points of the Clock Phase
TV back view and Sampling Clock adjustments may be
incomprehensible according to the input signals.
Adjusting the picture position
1 From the Display Settings in the PREFERENCES
menu, press  or  to select PC Settings.
2 Press OK to display the PC Settings menu.
Computer Audio cable for
PC Settings
PC-to-TV
connection Horizontal Position 0
Vertical Position 0
Clock Phase 0
Sampling Clock 0
Reset

NOTE: 3 Press  or  to select an option you want to

• The edges of the images may be hidden. adjust. Press  or  to adjust the settings as
• If connecting a certain PC model that signal is required.
particular, the PC signal may not be detected
correctly.

32

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 32 2013/09/27 8:23:17

 Connecting your TV

Adjusting the Clock Phase of the picture Connecting a network

If the Clock Phase, which synchronize the PC signal
and LCD display, is not optimized, the picture will
blur.
This function enables you to adjust Clock Phase
and display a clear picture.
1 From the PC Settings menu, press  or  to
select Clock Phase.
2 Press  or  to obtain a clear picture.
Adjusting the Sampling Clock
If the Sampling Clock does not match with the dot
clock frequency of the PC, blurred picture detail will
occur, or screen width will change, or drift patterns
in vertical lines may be apparent.
The LAN port allows your Toshiba TV to connect to
your network.
NOTE:
• If you use a Hub or switch to connect the TV to your
home network, you may not be able to use the
automatic setup and have to manually set up the
network address (- page 38).
• If you use a router with built-in DHCP functionality,
use the automatic setup. Manual setup may not
work.
• If you connect the TV and PC directly, use a crossover
LAN cable.
To connect the TV to a network - Wired
LAN

This function enables you to adjust it and optimize

TV back view
the picture.
1 From the PC Settings menu, press  or  to
select Sampling Clock.
Modem Router with Hub
2 Press  or  to optimize the picture.

Resetting the PC Settings

The Reset function adjusts the PC Settings to the
factory settings. [1] [2]

Server PC [2] [3]

1 From the PC Settings menu, press  or  to
select Reset. Cable or
Phone jack
2 Press OK. [2]
3 A confirmation message will appear. Press  or
 to select Yes, and then press OK.
NOTE:
When a PC is connected using HDMI none of these
function will be available. [1] Coaxial or telephone cable (depending on your
modem type)
[2] Standard LAN cable
[3] DO NOT connect a phone jack directly to the TV’s
LAN port.

33

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 33 2013/09/27 8:23:17

 Connecting your TV
To connect the TV to a network - Wireless
To connect to a wireless network, use a TOSHIBA
Dual Band WLAN Adaptor (WLM-40U : not supplied).
Please refer to “Setting up the Network” section.
Access point (AP)
Left side view
Wireless LAN router
TOSHIBA Dual Band
Modem WLAN adaptor
PC
How to use this Dual Band Wireless LAN Adaptor
• If this device is going to be operated in the
frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.35 GHz, it is
restricted to indoor use.
When using a wireless network
Wireless Interoperability
The TOSHIBA Dual Band WLAN Adaptor is designed
to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product
that is based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum
(DSSS)/Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
(OFDM) radio technology, and is compliant to:
• The IEEE 802.11 Standard on Wireless LANs
(Revision a/b/g/n), as defined and approved
by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers.
• The TOSHIBA Dual Band WLAN Adaptor is
intended for use this TV and should not be used
with any other devices.
• Use of the WLAN Adaptor in other USB products
may result in damage to the WLAN Adaptor and
or the equipment. Such use will void any warranty
that may otherwise apply, and TOSHIBA will have
no liability for any damage that may result from
such use.
34
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 34
CAUTION:
• Bluetooth™ and Wireless LAN devices operate within
the same radio frequency range and may interfere
with one another. If you use Bluetooth™ and Wireless
LAN devices simultaneously, you may occasionally
experience a less than optimal network performance
or even lose your network connection.
• If you should experience any such problem,
immediately turn off either your Bluetooth™ or
Wireless LAN device.
• Actual performance can vary, including lower
wireless network capacity, data throughput rate,
range and coverage.
• Performance depends on many factors, conditions
and variables, including distance from the access
point, volume of network traffic, building materials
and construction, operating system used, mix of
wireless products used, interference and other
adverse conditions.
Wireless LAN and your Health
Wireless LAN products, like other radio devices, emit
radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level
of energy emitted by Wireless LAN devices, however,
is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted
by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
Because Wireless LAN products operate within the
guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards
and recommendations, TOSHIBA believes Wireless
LAN is safe for use by consumers. These standards
and recommendations reflect the consensus of the
scientific community and result from deliberations
of panels and committees of scientists who
continually review and interpret the extensive
research literature.
In some situations or environments, the use of
Wireless LAN may be restricted by the proprietor
of the building or responsible representatives of
the organization. Such restrictions may apply in
environments where the risk of interference to
other devices or services is perceived or identified
as harmful.
If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the
use of wireless devices in a specific organization
or environment, you are encouraged to ask for
authorization to use the Wireless LAN device prior to
turning on the equipment.
How to use this Dual Band Wireless LAN Adaptor
• If this device is going to be operated in the
frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.35 GHz, it is
restricted to indoor use.
2013/09/27 8:23:18
 Connecting your TV
Setting up the Network
To select the Network Type
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, press  or  to
select Network Setup and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Network Type, and then
press  or to select Wired or Wireless.
Network Setup
Network Type Wireless
Wireless Setup
Advanced Network Setup
Network Connection Test
Network PIN Setup
Network Lock Off
NOTE:
If the Dual Band WLAN Adaptor is not connected,
Network Type is not displayed.
3 If you selected Wired, see “Advanced Network
Setup” (- page 37).
Wireless Setup
NOTE:
• This feature is not displayed when the Dual Band
WLAN Adaptor is not connected.
• This feature is greyed out when Network Type is set
to Wired.
• When you insert or remove the Dual Band WLAN
Adaptor, you must turn off your TV and unplug the
power cord, and then plug and turn on again.
• Continued connection of AP (Access Point) is not
guaranteed. The connection may be disconnected
while watching TV.
• Do not remove the Dual Band WLAN Adaptor
when Network Type is set to Wireless or wireless
communication is active.
There are 3 methods for Wireless Setup:
Easy Setup (PBC or PIN)
If the AP supports WPS, this method can be used.
• WPS is an industry standard designed to make
connection of wireless LAN equipment and
security setup easy. WPS will automatically
configure all wireless settings.
NOTE:
WEP encryption may not be able to configured by easy
setup.
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 35
Assisted setup by using the Wireless Routers
notification information.
Network name, Authentication and Encryption
are decided based on information sent from the
Wireless router. Security key to be set manually.
Manual setup
Network name, Authentication, Encryption and
Security Key all to be input manually.
Easy Setup using PBC (Push Button Configuration)
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, select Network
Setup and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Wireless Setup and
press OK.
3 Press  or  to select Easy Setup and press
OK.
Wireless Setup
Easy Setup
Assisted Setup
Manual Setup
4 Press  or  to select PBC.
5 Press  to highlight Start Scan and press OK.
6 Following the on-screen instructions, push the
appropriate button on your AP.
7 When a window reporting that the setup is
complete appears, press OK.
To cancel searching for the AP:
Press BACK while searching for the AP. A message
will appear, and then press  or  to select Yes and
press OK.
Easy Setup using PIN (Personal Identification Number)
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, select Network
Setup and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Wireless Setup and
press OK.
3 Press  or  to select Easy Setup and press
OK.
4 Press  or  to select PIN.
5 Press  to select Start Scan and press OK.
6 Press  or  to select the desired AP and press
OK.
NOTE:
Check the Network Name and/or MAC address
on the label of the AP or in the manual, and select
your AP.
35
2013/09/27 8:23:18
 Connecting your TV
7 When the PIN code window appears, enter the
displayed PIN into your AP, and then press Next
to continue the PIN Setup. When a message
displays to report that the setup is complete,
press OK.
To cancel searching for the AP:
Press BACK while searching for the AP. A message
will appear; then, press  or  to select Yes and
press OK.
Assisted Setup
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, select Network
Setup and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Wireless Setup and
press OK.
3 Press  or  to select Assisted Setup and
press OK.
4 Press  or  to select the desired AP and press
OK.
NOTE:
Check the MAC address on the label of the AP or in
the manual, and select your AP.
5 Press  or  to select Security Key and press
OK.
The Software Keyboard window will appear.
6 Input the Security Key by using the Software
Keyboard (- page 39).
To save your setting, press the BLUE button.
NOTE:
• The Security Key must adhere to these
conditions:
- TKIP/AES: 8-63 ASCII or 64 Hex characters
- WEP: 5 or 13 ASCII or 10 or 26 Hex characters
• There is only one key ID to set for WEP
encryption.
7 Highlight Done and press OK.
NOTE:
If Network Name is not displayed, see step 4 and
5 in Manual Setup below to set Network Name
before pressing Done.
NOTE:
Settings are not saved if BACK is pressed before Done
is selected.
36
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 36
Manual Setup
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, select Network
Setup and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Wireless Setup and
press OK.
3 Press  or  to select Manual Setup and press
OK.
4 Press  or  to select Network Name and
press OK.
The Software Keyboard window will appear.
5 Input the Network Name by using the Software
Keyboard (- page 39).
To save your setting, press the BLUE button.
6 Press  or  to select Authentication and
press  or  to select Open System, Shared
Key, WPA2/WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK.
7 Press  or  to select Encryption and press 
or  to select None, WEP, AES or AES/TKIP.
NOTE:
• Certain encryption types are only compatible
with specific authentication types.
- When Authentication is Open System, WEP
or None is compatible.
- When Authentication is Shared Key, WEP or
None is compatible.
- When Authentication is WPA2/WPA-PSK,
AES or AES/TKIP is compatible.
- When Authentication is WPA2-PSK, only
AES is compatible.
• There is only one key ID to set for WEP
encryption.
8 Press  or  to select Security Key and press
OK.
9 Input the Security Key by using the Software
Keyboard (- page 39).
To save your setting, press the BLUE button.
NOTE:
This item is greyed out when Encryption is None.
10 Highlight Done and press OK.
NOTE:
When Encryption is None, a message will
appear. Press  or  to select Yes and press OK.
NOTE:
Settings are not saved if BACK is pressed before Done
is selected.
2013/09/27 8:23:18
 Connecting your TV

Wireless Information NOTE:

The settings configured in Wireless Setup can be Even if an AP for IEEE 802.11n is used when
confirmed. Encryption is set to WEP or AES/TKIP, the
Speed value might be low. It is recommended that
1 Press QUICK to open the Quick Menu. Encryption be changed to AES (see “Manual Setup”
- page 36).
2 Press  or  to select Wireless Information
and press OK. Notes on wireless LAN environment:
• When the Network Type is Wireless, a • The function of all IEEE 802.11 is not supported.
Wireless Information window will appear. • The ad-hoc mode is not supported.
NOTE: • It is recommended to use IEEE 802.11a or
Press the RED button to scan for all APs. IEEE 802.11n on 5 GHz for audio and SD video
streaming.
Item Description • It is recommended to use IEEE 802.11n on 5 GHz
for HD video streaming.
Status Connected is displayed when • It is recommended that the encoding rate for
the TV is connected with the AP. streaming video content is 20 Mbps or less.
Disconnected is displayed • It is not recommended to use 2.4 GHz for audio
when the TV is not connected and video streaming.
with the AP. • Content playback may be interrupted by various
surrounding interference.
Signal Connection signal strength with
AP (STRONG/MEDIUM/WEAK) Advanced Network Setup
Speed Link with AP NOTE:
Mode Working mode (11a, 11b, 11g, • When the DHCP function of the router connected
11n) with this TV is On, you can set Auto Setup to On or
Off. (This should usually be set to On.)
Network Name SSID set • When the DHCP function of the router is Off, set
Authentication Authentication set Auto Setup to Off, and set the IP Address manually.

Encryption Encryption set IP Address Setup

Security Key Security Key set Auto Setup:

AP MAC The AP’s MAC address is 1 From the PREFERENCES menu, select Network
Address displayed when the TV is Setup and press OK.
connected with the AP. 2 Press  or  to select Advanced Network
TV MAC The MAC address of the USB Setup, and press OK.
Address (Dual Band WLAN Adaptor) is 3 Press  or  to select IP Address Setup, and
displayed. press OK.
DHCP Enabled is displayed when 4 Select Auto Setup, and then press  or  to
using DHCP. select On.
Disabled is displayed when not
using DHCP. IP Address Setup

IP Address The TV’s IP address Auto Setup On

IP Address
Subnet Mask Value of the Subnet Mask Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Default Address of the Default Gateway
Gateway
NOTE:
DNS Address of the DNS Other items will be greyed out when Auto Setup is set
to On.

37

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 37 2013/09/27 8:23:18

 Connecting your TV
Manual Setup:
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, select Network
Setup and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Advanced Network
Setup, and press OK.
3 Press  or  to select IP Address Setup, and
press OK.
4 Select Auto Setup, and then press  or  to
select Off.
5 Press  or  to select IP Address.
6 Press  or  to select the field you want to
change, and then use the Number buttons to
input the IP address. To save the setting, press
OK.
NOTE:
IP address field numbers must be between 0 and
255. After each field number has been set, press
OK to store the entire address. If the entire IP
Address is invalid, a warning message will appear
after OK is pressed.
7 Press  or  to select Subnet Mask, and edit
in the same way as IP Address.
8 Press  or  to select Default Gateway, and
edit in the same way as IP Address.
NOTE:
If you manually set the IP address, you must not use the
same IP address for any other device. The IP address
you use should be a private address.
DNS Setup
Auto Setup:
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, select Network
Setup and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Advanced Network
Setup, and press OK.
3 Press  or  to select DNS Setup, and press
OK.
4 Select Auto Setup, and then press  or  to
select On.
NOTE:
Other items will be greyed out when Auto Setup is set
to On.
38
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 38
Manual Setup:
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, select Network
Setup and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Advanced Network
Setup, and press OK.
3 Press  or  to select DNS Setup, and press
OK.
4 Select Auto Setup, and then press  or  to
select Off.
5 Press  or  to select Primary DNS Address.
6 Press  or  to highlight the field you want
to change, and then use the number buttons
to input the Primary DNS Address. To save the
setting, press OK.
NOTE:
DNS address field numbers must be between 0
and 255. If you input an incompatible number
and press OK, the field number will reset to the
previous value.
7 Press  or  to select Secondary DNS
Address, and edit in the same way as Primary
DNS Address.
MAC Address
You can view the fixed MAC address.
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, select Network
Setup and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Advanced Network
Setup, and press OK.
3 Press  or  to select MAC Address, and press
OK.
Network Connection Test
This function checks the Internet connectivity.
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, select Network
Setup and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Network Connection
Test and press OK.
A message will appear to indicate if the
connection was successful or if it could not be
completed.
NOTE:
The result of Network Connection Test does not
always guarantee the connection. Depending on
the situation, network function may not be able
to be used.
2013/09/27 8:23:18
 Connecting your TV

To cancel the Network Connection Test: Using the software keyboard

1 Press EXIT while searching for the Internet
connection.
Setting the Network Lock
• This feature is available when you set Network
PIN Setup in the Network Setup menu (- page
39).
• You can use the Network Lock feature to prevent
the network function.
• This feature will be greyed out until a PIN is set.
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, select Network
Setup and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Network Lock and press
 or  to select On.
To unlock the Network:
1 Select Off in step 2 above.
Network PIN Setup
1 From the Network Setup menu, press OK and
press  or  to select Network PIN Setup.
2 Press OK and press the Number buttons to
enter a 4-digit number. Confirm the code.
NOTE:
PIN code cannot be set to “0000”.
To change or delete your PIN code:
1 From the Network PIN Setup menu, press the
Number buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN code.
2 Select Change PIN or Delete PIN and press OK.
Change PIN
Press the Number buttons to enter a new
4-digit number.
Delete PIN
Press  or  to select Yes, and then press OK.
NOTE:
PIN code cannot be set to “0000”.
You can enter text by using the Software Keyboard.
The Software Keyboard window will appear when
you press OK on a field that accepts character input.
To enter text using the software keyboard:
1 Highlight the desired character on the on-
screen software keyboard.
2 Press OK.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you have entered all
desired text.
4 Press the BLUE button to close the software
keyboard and return to the previous screen.
NOTE:
If BACK is pressed, changes are not saved and the
software keyboard window is closed. The text will
remain as it was before starting the keyboard.
Input operation on the remote control:
Button Description
OK Inputs the selected character.
 Moves the character highlight.
RED Deletes 1 character to the left of the
cursor.
GREEN Cycles through upper case, lower
case, numbers, and symbols, if
available.
BLUE Saves changes and closes the
Software Keyboard window.
BACK Closes the Software Keyboard
window without saving changes.

39

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 39 2013/09/27 8:23:18

 Connecting your TV
Using YouTube
You can easily access the YouTube homepage.
NOTE:
You need to configure a network connection before
using this feature (- page 33).
1 Press MENU, and then press  or  to display
the APPLICATIONS menu.
APPLICATIONS
Media Player
YouTube
On Timer
Sleep Timer 00:00
2 Press  or  to select YouTube, and then press
OK.
The YouTube homepage appears.
• You can select YouTube from the Quick Menu.
NOTE:
• Some features require an always-on broadband
internet connection, firmware update and/or
additional bandwidth dedicated to this product.
Third party services may change or be discontinued
or restricted at any time. Toshiba makes no
warranties, representations, or assurances about
the content, availability or functionality of third-
party content or services. Use of third party services
may require registration by a computer and/
or payment of charges and membership. Not all
services or content may be available on this product,
in your country or with your language. In order to
experience the full capabilities of this product, fully
compatible devices may be required.
• This service may be forcibly blocked according to the
situation of CSP service.
• This function may not behave correctly depending
on the network environment.
40
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 40
Using the Screen Mirroring function
You can view the screen of your tablet, smartphone
or PC on the TV.
• This function is available when a TOSHIBA Dual
Band WLAN Adaptor (WLM-40U : not supplied) is
connected.
1 From the APPLICATIONS menu, select Screen
Mirroring and press OK.
APPLICATIONS
Media Player
YouTube
Screen Mirroring
On Timer
Sleep Timer 00:00
• Alternatively, press QUICK to display the
Quick Menu, and select it.
NOTE:
If the Dual Band WLAN Adaptor (WLM-40U : not
supplied) is not connected, Screen Mirroring is
not displayed.
2 Press  or  to select Screen Mirroring and
press OK.
The connection standby screen appears.
3 Operate your tablet, smartphone or PC to
display the screen on the TV.
Select the TV which you wish to connect to.
“Connecting” will be shown on the TV.
• PBC mode:
After the Screen Mirroring connection is
complete, the TV screen will mirror the
content shown on the tablet, smartphone or
PC.
• PIN mode:
Proceed to step 4.
4 Connecting your tablet, smartphone or PC to
your TV the first time
When selecting the Toshiba TV for the first time,
a 8-digit code will appear on your TV screen.
This code needs to be input into your tablet or
smartphone to authenticate the connection.
If authentication has already taken place,
”Connecting” will appear on screen.
• After the Screen Mirroring connection is
complete, the TV screen will mirror the
content shown on the tablet, smartphone or
PC.
2013/09/27 8:23:18
 Connecting your TV
NOTE:
• When the Screen Mirroring software is active, other
applications may not be usable.
To exit Screen Mirroring:
Exit using your tablet, smartphone or PC or by
pressing EXIT on the TV remote control.
NOTE:
It may not be possible to connect some tablets,
smartphones and PCs to the TV.
Screen Mirroring Device Name
You can check the device name.
1 In the Screen Mirroring menu, press  or  to
select Device Name and press OK.
• The device name appears.
Screen Mirroring information
You can check the Screen Mirroring information.
1 Press QUICK to open the Quick Menu.
2 Press  or  to select Information and press
OK.
Connected Device, Resolution, Video Codec
and Audio Codec information is displayed.
3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 41
Using the Media Player
This TV allows you to enjoy movie, music and photo
files stored on a USB device connected to the USB
port.
Terminology
The TV can control and play content from a USB
device.
NOTE:
• Do not insert/remove USB device while in use.
• MENU is not available during playback.
Media Player Specifications
Device
USB device
Interface version: USB2.0 HS
USB Mass Storage Class devices (MSC)
NOTE:
• Connectivity is not guaranteed for all devices.
• Incorrect behaviour may occur with a USB hub
connection.
• Turn off the TV before connecting a USB HDD
devices.
• The Auto Format function is not available.
• The aspect ratio may not be correct in some cases.
File system: FAT16 and FAT32
You must obtain any required permission
from copyright owners to download or use
copyrighted content. TOSHIBA cannot and does
not grant such permission.
Basic operation
Using Media Player
When Auto Start is enabled, you will be asked if
you want to start the Media Player whenever a USB
device is inserted. If Auto Start is disabled, you must
manually start the Media Player from the menu.
To change the Auto Start setting:
1 From the APPLICATIONS menu, press  or 
to select Media Player and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Setup and press OK.
3 Press  or  to select Auto Start and press 
or  to select On or Off.
41
2013/09/27 8:23:18
 Connecting your TV

Auto Start: Viewing photo files

1 Insert USB device into the USB socket on the left There are three types of viewing modes.
side of the TV. A prompt will appear.
Multi View
2 Press  or  to select Yes and press OK.
This view allows you to search for photos in a grid
3 Press  or  to select Photo, Movie or Music format.
and press OK. The pictures are displayed using thumbnail data in
each image file.
Multi View will appear.
NOTE: /C:
Photo

If Auto Start is set to Off, you can start the Media

Player manually.
XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg

Manual Start:
1 Insert USB device into the USB socket on the left XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg

side of the TV.

2 From the APPLICATIONS menu, press  or 
XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg

to select Media Player and press OK.

3 Press  or  to select Photo, Movie or Music
and press OK.
Multi View will appear.
To select a file in the Multi View:
1 Press , ,  or  to select a file or folder.
Select a file and press OK to start playback.
Select a folder and press OK to move to the
next layer.
To return to the previous layer, press BACK.
To display the device information:
1 Press QUICK to open the Quick Menu.
2 Press  or  to select Device Information.
To close the Media Player:
1 Press EXIT.
The initial highlighted position will be on the top
left thumbnail in the Multi View.
1 Press , ,  or  to select a photo or folder.
PU / Pu buttons can be used to page up/down
the Multi View when there are more photos
than will fit onto one screen.
2 When you select a folder, press OK to move to
the next layer. Press BACK to move back to the
previous layer.
3 Press OK to view the selected photo in Single
View mode.
Single View
In this mode, only files located in the selected
directory will be displayed. This view allows you
to change the photo content manually. When
moving from Multi View to Single View, the currently
selected photo will be displayed.
• Press  to view the next photo. Press  to view
the previous photo.
• Press  to rotate the image 90° clockwise. Press
 to rotate the image 90° counterclockwise.
• Press to display file status information.

42

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 42 2013/09/27 8:23:19

 Connecting your TV

Slide Show Viewing movie files

This view allows you to watch a slide show of You can select movies from a Multi View of
your photos. In this mode, only files located in the available files.
selected directory will be played.
Multi View
1 To start slideshow, press OK in the Single View
mode. Movie
/C:

2 Press  or  to view the previous/next photo.

• Press to display file status information. XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXXX.mpg XXXXXXXX.mpg XXXXXXXX.mpg XXXXXXXX.mpg

NOTE:
Pressing  or  while in the Slide Show mode will XXXXXXXX.mpg XXXXXXXX.mpg XXXXXXXX.mpg XXXXXXXX.mpg

stop the slideshow and rotate the photo.

To set Interval Time setting:
1 Press QUICK to open the Quick Menu.
2 Press  or  to select Interval Time. 1 Press , ,  or  to select a file or folder. PU
3 Press  or  to select 3sec, 5sec, 10sec, 15sec, / Pu buttons can be used to page up/down the
30sec, 60sec, or 90sec. Multi View when there are more files than will
fit onto one screen.
To zoom in/out photos
2 When you select a folder, press OK to move to
During the Single View mode or Slide Show mode, the next layer. Press BACK to move back to the
the zoom function can be used. previous layer.
RED button (Zoom in)
x1 S x2 S x4 S x8 zoom 3 With the desired file selected, press OK or 
GREEN button (Zoom out) (play) to start playback.
x8 S x4 S x2 S x1 zoom 4 Press v to stop playback.
BACK button: Normal playback
NOTE:
  buttons: Vertical or Horizontal scrolling
If playback finishes before v is pressed, the screen will
NOTE: return to the Multi View.
Using the zoom function while in the Slide Show
mode will stop the slideshow and zoom in the photo. During playback:
• Press W to pause.
To close the Photo Viewer
PAUSE may not be available depending on the
1 Press EXIT. contents.
• To resume normal playback, press  (play).
File Compatibility • To play in fast reverse or fast forward directions,
press CC or cc during playback. Each time you
See page 47.
press the CC or cc, the playback speed will
change.
• Press z to skip to the beginning of the next
chapter. Press Z to skip to the beginning of
the current chapter. Press Z within 2 seconds
after the chapter starts to return to the previous
chapter.
If the content is not categorized into chapters,
press z to skip to the next content, or press Z to
skip to the beginning of the current content. Press
Z within 2 seconds after the content starts to
return to the beginning of the previous content.
• Press to display the file status information
(content number, movie title, progress time etc.).

43

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 43 2013/09/27 8:23:20

 Connecting your TV

NOTE: To register your TV to a DivX® account:

• The information may not be correctly displayed
depending on the contents.
• During playback, you can adjust the PICTURE and
SOUND menu functions from the Quick Menu.
• The playback speed (CC / cc) may not change
depending on the contents.
To select subtitle and audio languages
• Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select your
preferred subtitle language.
• Press s repeatedly to select your preferred
audio language.
NOTE:
This feature is not available depending on the
contents.
Setting the repeat mode
1 Press QUICK to open the Quick Menu.
2 Press  or  to select Repeat.
3 Press  or  to select Off, All or 1.
Mode Description
Off The file is played back only once.
All Files in the same folder are repeatedly
played back.
1 The same file is repeatedly played back.
4 Press BACK.
Resume Play
You can resume playback from where it was last
stopped.
Press v while playing the movie to memorize the
stopped position.
On the Multi View screen, if you select a movie
whose stopped position has been memorized, the
message “Resume Play?” will appear. Select Yes to
resume playback from the last stopped position.
NOTE:
If you play different content or exit Media Player, the
memorized stopped position will be deleted.
To close the Movie Viewer
1 Press EXIT.
File Compatibility
See page 47.
This TV allows you to play back files purchased
or rented from DivX® Video-On Demand (VOD)
services. When you purchase or rent DivX® VOD
files on the internet, you will be asked to enter a
registration code.
1 From the Media Player menu, press  or  to
select Setup and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select DivX® VOD and press
OK.
3 Press  or  to highlight DivX® VOD
Registration and press OK.
4 The DivX® VOD window will appear and you
will see the registration code. For details on
registration, please visit the DivX® website at
http://vod.divx.com.
5 Copy the activation file to a memory device and
play it on the TV.
To deregister your device
1 In step 3 above, highlight DivX® VOD
Deregistration, and then press OK.
2 A confirmation message will appear. Select Yes
and press OK.
3 The DivX® VOD window will appear and you
will see the deregistration code. For details on
deregistration, please visit the DivX® website at
http://vod.divx.com.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video
format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi
Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified®
device that has passed rigorous testing to verify
that it plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more
information and software tools to convert your files
into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order to play
purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To
obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD
section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.
com for more information on how to complete your
registration.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® and DivX Plus® HD
(H.264/MKV) video up to 1080p HD including
premium content.

44

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 44 2013/09/27 8:23:20

 Connecting your TV

To playback DivX Plus HD content: Playing music files

• To play in fast reverse or fast forward directions, You can select music from a Multi View of available
press CC or cc during playback. Each time you files.
press CC or cc, the playback speed will change.
• This TV generates original chapter point in 10% Multi View
increments for 10 chapters in total, that are
accessible by using the Number buttons on the Music
//MP3
remote control.
• Press  to skip to the next file, or  to return to
the previous file. XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXXX.mp3 XXXXXXXX.mp3 XXXXXXXX.mp3 XXXXXXXX.mp3

• Press  to skip to the next title, or  to return to

the previous title.
During playback, press z to skip to the beginning
XXXXXXXX.mp3 XXXXXXXX.mp3 XXXXXXXX.mp3 XXXXXXXX.mp3

of the next chapter. If z is pressed at the last

chapter, a message appears. If "Yes" is selected,
playback will skip to the next title or content.
Press Z to skip to the beginning of the current
chapter. Press Z within 2 seconds after the chapter
starts to return to the previous chapter. If Z is
1 Press , ,  or  to select a file or folder. PU
/ Pu buttons can be used to page up/down the
pressed within 2 seconds after Chapter 1 starts, a
Multi View when there are more files than will
message appears. If "Yes" is selected, playback will
fit onto one screen.
return to the previous title or content.
2 When you select a folder, press OK to move to
the next layer. Press BACK to move back to the
The Number button is used for direct jump. If the
previous layer.
3 button is pressed, playback will jump to the
beginning of 3rd chapter. 3 With the desired file selected, press OK or c
NOTE: (play) to start playback.
• When a rental file is played, Z or z cannot be used
to move between the files.
4 Press v to stop playback.
• The above operations cannot be performed NOTE:
depending on the content. • Depending on the file size, it may take some time for
• The playback speed (CC / cc) may not change playback to begin.
depending on the stream. • During playback, you can adjust the SOUND menu
functions from the Quick Menu.
Using Multi Title and Alternative Timelines Multi Title:
During playback:
DivX Plus HD files may contain up to 100 titles.
• Press W to pause.
You can change the title (It contains same video file)
• To resume normal playback, press c (play).
by pressing the RED button.
PAUSE may not be available depending on the
When the RED button is pressed, it will display the contents.
title change window at the bottom on the screen • To play in fast reverse or fast forward directions,
(same as Subtitle or Audio change window). press CC or cc during playback. Each time you
The title is changed cyclically each time the RED press CC or cc, the playback speed will change.
button is pressed. Playback will start from start time • Press z to skip to the next track. Press Z to skip
of selected title every press RED button. to the beginning of the current track. Press Z
again to skip to the beginning of the previous
NOTE:
track.
The above operations cannot be performed depending
on the content.

45

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 45 2013/09/27 8:23:20

 Connecting your TV

To set the repeat mode: Software Upgrade

1 Press QUICK to open the Quick Menu. TOSHIBA may offer upgrades for the TV’s software in
the future.
2 Press  or  to select Repeat.
The TV’s software is upgraded via the Network.
3 Press  or  to select Off, All or 1. Before downloading software:
Mode Description Configure your TV to connect to the Internet.
Off Files in the same folder are played back NOTE:
once. • While the upgrade is being performed, you will not
be able to watch the TV.
All Files in the same folder are repeatedly • The software upgrade may take time.
played back.
1 The same file is repeatedly played back.
1 From the SETUP menu, press  or  to select
Software Upgrade and press OK.

4 Press BACK.
SETUP
To display the file status information Menu Language English
Auto Tuning
1 Press during playback. The information will Manual Tuning
Quick Setup
be displayed on the centre of the screen.
Location Home

2 Press again to remove the information. Software Upgrade

Software Licences
NOTE: System Information

The information may not be correctly displayed

depending on the contents.
2 Press OK.
Closing the Music Player: NOTE:
If the network is not available, a warning message
1 Press EXIT. will appear.
File Compatibility 3 The TV software upgrade will start when
See page 48. download succeeds.

46

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 46 2013/09/27 8:23:21

 Reference section
APPENDIX
Media Player Supported Formats

Media Media File

Video/Audio codec Note
Player Format Extention
JPEG .jpg JPEG Data compatibility: JPEG Exif ver 2.1
.jpeg Maximum number of files: 4096 per
folder

*) Some files may not be played.

PNG .png PNG
Photo

BMP .bmp BMP

AVI .avi Video) H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) Maximum number of files: 4096 per
DivX 3, 4, 5 folder
Xvid Maximum viewable resolution:
MJPEG 1920x1080

Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer2 *) Some files may not be played.

MPEG-1/2 Layer3
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
L-PCM
ADPCM
WMA7/8/9 Std
Movie MPEG-2 .mpg Video) MPEG-1 Video
PS .mpeg MPEG-2 Video
.dat Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer2
MPEG-1/2 Layer3
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
L-PCM
MPEG-2 .ts Video) MPEG-2 Video
TS .trp H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
.tp VC-1 (WMV9)
.m2ts Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer2
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
L-PCM

47

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 47 2013/09/27 8:23:21

 Reference section

Media Media File

Video/Audio codec Note
Player Format Extention
MPEG-2 .vob Video) MPEG-2 Video
VOB Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer2
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
L-PCM
MOV .mov Video) H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
MPEG-4 part2
MJPEG
Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer3
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
MP4 .mp4 Video) H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
.m4v Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer3
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
ASF .asf Video) MPEG-4 part2
.wmv VC-1 (WMV9)
.xvid Audio) ADPCM
WMA7/8/9 Std
DivX .divx Video) DivX 5
.div Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer3
Movie
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
MKV .mkv Video) MPEG-2 Video
.xdiv MPEG-4 part2
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
Xvid
Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer2
MPEG-1/2 Layer3
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
RealMedia .rm Video) RealVideo 8, 9, 10
.rmvb Audio) RA-COOK
Flash .flv Video) Sorenson H.263 (FLV1)
Video H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
(FLV1) Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer3
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
3GPP .3gp Video) MPEG-4 part2
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
Audio) MPEG-4 LC AAC
MP3 .mp3 MPEG-1/2 Layer3 Maximum number of files: 4096 per
MP4 .mp4 MPEG-2/4 LC AAC folder
.m4a
WMA .wma WMA7/8/9/ Std
Music
WAV .wav L-PCM
ADPCM
MKA .mka MPEG-1/2 Layer-2
MPEG-1/2 Layer-3

48

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 48 2013/09/27 8:23:21

 Reference section

Signal Class Table

C mode
OSD RF Frequency [MHz] OSD RF Frequency [MHz]
OSD RF Frequency [MHz] C45 663.25 S9 161.25
C1 44.25 C46 671.25 S10 168.25
C2 48.25 C47 679.25 S11 231.25
C3 55.25 C48 687.25 S13 238.25
C4 62.25 C49 695.25 S14 245.25
C5 175.25 C50 703.25 S15 252.25
C6 182.25 C51 711.25 S16 259.25
C7 189.25 C52 719.25 S17 266.25
C8 196.25 C53 727.25 S18 273.25
C9 203.25 C54 735.25 S19 280.25
C10 210.25 C55 743.25 S20 287.25
C11 217.25 C56 751.25 S21 294.25
C12 224.25 C57 759.25 S22 303.25
C21 471.25 C58 767.25 S23 311.25
C22 479.25 C59 775.25 S24 319.25
C23 487.25 C60 783.25 S25 327.25
C24 495.25 C61 791.25 S26 335.25
C25 503.25 C62 799.25 S27 343.25
C26 511.25 C63 807.25 S28 351.25
C27 519.25 C64 815.25 S29 359.25
C28 527.25 C65 823.25 S30 367.25
C29 535.25 C66 831.25 S31 375.25
C30 543.25 C67 839.25 S32 383.25
C31 551.25 C68 847.25 S33 391.25
C32 559.25 C69 855.25 S34 399.25
C33 567.25 C70 863.25 S35 407.25
C34 575.25 S36 415.25
S mode
C35 583.25 S37 431.25
C36 591.25 OSD RF Frequency [MHz] S38 439.25
C37 599.25 S1 105.25 S39 447.25
C38 607.25 S2 112.25 S40 455.25
C39 615.25 S3 119.25 S41 463.25
C40 623.25 S4 126.25 S51 69.25
C41 631.25 S5 133.25 S52 76.25
C42 639.25 S6 140.25 S53 83.25
C43 647.25 S7 147.25 S54 90.25
C44 655.25 S8 154.25 S55 97.25
49

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 49 2013/09/27 8:23:21

 Reference section

Troubleshooting Some pixels of the screen do not light up

Before calling a service technician, please check the
following table for a possible cause of the symptom
and some solutions.
Symptom and solution
TV will not turn on
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in, and
then press 1.
• The remote control batteries may be dead.
Replace the batteries.
No picture, no sound
• Check the aerial connections.
No sound, picture OK
• The sound may be muted. Press 2 +, − or
. • Check if the direction of the aerial has
• The station may have broadcast difficulties.
Try another channel.
Poor sound, picture OK
• The station may have broadcast difficulties.
Try another channel.
Poor picture, sound OK
• Check the aerial connections.
• The station may have broadcast difficulties.
Try another channel.
• Adjust the PICTURE menu.
Poor reception of broadcast channels
• Check the aerial connections.
• The station may have broadcast difficulties.
Try another channel.
• Make sure the Colour System is properly set.
Teletext problems
• Check the aerial connections.
• Good performance of text depends on a good
strong broadcast signal.
• The LCD display panel is manufactured
using an extremely high level of precision
technology, however, sometimes some pixels
of the screen may be missing picture elements
or have luminous spots. This is not a sign of a
malfunction.
The picture brightness varies when you display switch
the TV on.
• If you switch the TV on at 0°C and under, wait
until the warms up.
Multiple images
• The station may have broadcast difficulties.
Try another channel.
• Aerial reception may be poor. Use a high
directional outdoor aerial.
changed.
Poor colour or no colour
• The station may have broadcast difficulties.
Try another channel.
• Adjust the Tint and/or Colour in the PICTURE
menu.
The remote control does not operate
• Remove all obstructions between the remote
control and the remote control sensor on the
TV.
• The remote control batteries may be dead.
Replace the batteries.
If the PIN code has been forgotten:
• Use the Master PIN (code of 1276), then
change to a number of your choice. Ensure
that no-one else can use the Master PIN by
removing the Owner's Manual.

50

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 50 2013/09/27 8:23:21

 Reference section

Broadcast system Specifications

Broadcast transmission systems of each country LED TV
or region Model
32L3300 Series,
Asia M.E. 39L3300 Series
Country or region Colour Sound Power source
110V-240V AC, 50/60Hz
Bahrain, Kuwait, Israel, Oman, PAL B/G
Power consumption
Qatar,
32" : 79 W, 0.4 W (standby)
United Arab Emirates, Yemen,
39" : 123 W, 0.4 W (standby)
etc.
Indonesia, Malaysia, Dimensions
Singapore, Thailand, etc. 32" : 736 mm (W) 504 mm (H) 180 mm (D)
39" : 891 mm (W) 590 mm (H) 180 mm (D)
China, Vietnam PAL D/K
Mass (Weight)
China Hong Kong PAL I 32" : 6.5 kg
39" : 8.5 kg
Iraq, Islamic Republic of Iran, SECAM B/G
Lebanon, Saudi Arabia, etc. TV system (Aerial input)
Channel coverage:
Russian Federation, etc. SECAM D/K
PAL B/G (CCIR) VHF 2 - 12
Myanmar, Republic of the NTSC M UHF 21 - 69
Philippines, etc. CATV X - Z+2, S1 - S41
PAL I (UK) VHF -
UHF 21 - 69
Oceania CATV -
PAL D/K (CHINA) VHF 1 - 12
Country or region Colour Sound
UHF 13 - 57
Australia, New Zealand, etc. PAL B/G CATV Z1 - Z38
SECAM B/G (CCIR) VHF 2 - 12
UHF 21 - 69
Africa CATV X - Z+2, S1 - S41
Country or region Colour Sound SECAM D/K (OIRT) VHF 1 - 12
UHF 21 - 69
Republic of South Africa, etc. PAL I CATV X1 - X19
NTSC M (US) VHF 2 - 13
South America UHF 14 - 79
A6 - A1, A - W, AA -
CATV
ZZ, AAA, BBB
Country or region Colour Sound
NTSC M (JAPAN) VHF 1 - 12
Brazil PAL M UHF 13 - 62
CATV M1 - M10, S1 - S41
Chile, Colombia, etc. NTSC M
Special RF signal:
NTSC 4.43 colour system
NOTE:
5.5/6.0/6.5 MHz sound system
PAL, SECAM and NTSC 3.58 (MHz) are different colour
PAL 60 Hz colour system
signal broadcast transmission systems applicable to
5.5/6.0/6.5 MHz sound system
different countries or region. NTSC 4.43 (MHz) is used
in special VCRs to playback NTSC recorded video tapes COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT terminals (the signal
through PAL TV equipment. format)
480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720p (50/60 Hz), 1080i
(50/60 Hz)
(These signal formats are converted to match
the number of pixels of the LCD panel.)

51

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 51 2013/09/27 8:23:21

 Reference section

Standard VIDEO INPUT terminals (Colour System) Supplied accessories

PAL, SECAM, NTSC 3.58/4.43 Owner’s manual (1), Remote control (1),
Aspect ratio Batteries (2), Screw (1) (- page 4), Pedestal
16 : 9 stand (1), Screws (M5 x 2, M4 x 4) (- page
3)
Visible size (diagonal)
32" : 80.0 cm • Design and specifications are subject to change
39" : 97.9 cm without notice.
Number of pixels • Never service or remodel the TV by yourself. It
32" : 1366 (H) dots × 768 (V) dots may expose you to a fire hazard or dangerous
39" : 1920 (H) dots × 1080 (V) dots voltages.
Audio power
10 W + 10 W
Speakers
Main 40 5 120 mm 2pcs.
Input/Output terminals
o (1) Input
COMPONENT / Standard video or V
VIDEO INPUT Component video Y, PB/CB, PR/CR
Phono jacks Audio
L / Mono +R
o (2) Input A/V
VIDEO INPUT Phono jacks
O DIGITAL AUDIO Output
(optical) Bitstream / PCM
O AUDIO Output Audio L /
(FIXED) Phono jacks Mono, R
o RGB/PC Input
Mini D-sub 15 pin Analogue RGB
o PC/HDMI 1 Input
(AUDIO) 3.5 mm (Diameter) stereo
o HDMI1-2 Input (type A)
19 pin A/V Digital
HDMI (Lip Sync)
USB port 1-2 Media Player Interface version:
USB 2.0
USB class: Mass Storage
File system: FAT16 and FAT32
LAN port RJ-45
Operating condition
Temperature 0°C - 35°C
Humidity 20% - 80% (No moisture
condensation)

52

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 52 2013/09/27 8:23:21

 Reference section

Trademark Information • THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-

• The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition 4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are THE PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI OF A CONSUMER FOR (i) ENCODING VIDEO
Licensing LLC in the United States and other IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL
countries. STANDARD (MPEG-4 VIDEO) AND/OR (ii)
• Manufactured under license from Dolby DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
• DivX®, DivX Certified®, DivX Plus® HD and OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED
associated logos are trademarks of Rovi BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO
Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
license. ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Covered by one or more of the following U.S. INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL,
patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274 INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL L. C.
AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER SEE HTTP://WWW. MPEGLA. COM
TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH • This product contains technology subject to
THE AVC STANDARD (AVC VIDEO) AND/OR (ii) certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft.
DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY Use or distribution of this technology outside of
A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND this product is prohibited without the appropriate
NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS license(s) from Microsoft.
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED • This product includes technology owned by
TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED Microsoft Corporation and can not be used or
OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. distributed without a license from Microsoft
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED Licensing, GP.
FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
• MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed
from Fraunhofer LLS and Thomson.
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER
TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE VC-1 STANDARD (VC-1 VIDEO) AND/OR (ii)
DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A
CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON
COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED
FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE
VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA,
L. L. C.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

53

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 53 2013/09/27 8:23:21

 54

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 54 2013/09/27 8:23:21

 55

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 55 2013/09/27 8:23:21

3239L3300Series_En_TEVP.indd 56 2013/09/27 8:23:21
 32L3300
39L3300
©2013 TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TD/TE VX1A00285300
 ‫ﻣﺮﺣﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ‪Toshiba‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻛﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ LED‬ﻣﻦ ‪ .Toshiba‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ”ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ “LED‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺚ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪٢٩ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪٣٠ ............................................DVI‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪٣١ ............................................... PC/HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪٣١ ...................................................... HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪٣١ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪٣٢ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪٣٣ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪٣٥ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪٣٨ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪٣٩ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪٣٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪٣٩ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٤٠ .................................................................YouTube‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪٤٠ .................................... Screen Mirroring‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪٤١ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪٤١ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪٢٦ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‪٤٧ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻱ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪٥٠ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ‪٥١ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪٥١ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪٣ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪٤ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪٨ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ‪٨ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪٩ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪١٠ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١١ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪١١ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪١٥ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪١٦ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪١٦ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١٨ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪٢١ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪٢٤ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪٢٦ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪٢٦ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪٢٦ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ‪٢٧ ...............................................................................‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﺤﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪ .‬ﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪M5 × 2‬‬
‫‪M4 × 4‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺽ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ‪ ٢٤٠ - ١١٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ؛‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻌﺘﻤ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪ ASTA‬ﺃﻭ ‪ BSI‬ﻟـ ‪ .BS1362‬ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﻣﺼﻨﹼﻒ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻄﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻷﻱ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺪ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺴﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺷﺒﻴﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺠﺮﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺮﺵ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‪،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﱢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﺧﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻀﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻼ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺨﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺬﻭﺏ ﻣﺘﺴﺒﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﻀﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻃﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪(٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪(٥‬‬
‫‪(٦‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﻀﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻬﺘﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﹰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺰﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺎﻧﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻬﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺠﺮﻭﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻒ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(٧‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﻘﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﺴﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻦ ﺣﺮﻳﺼﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻣﻨﻌﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫‪(٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪(٩‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬

‫‪ (٥‬ﻻ ﺗﺸﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ (١٠‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﻋﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺷﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ (٦‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻨﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻔﻨﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ (١١‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﹼﺃﻻ ﻻﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫‪ (٧‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻋﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻠﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(١‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻟﻬﺐ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪،‬‬ ‫‪(١‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻔﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻠﻴﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪(٢‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪(٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻔﻨﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﺀﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺳﻘﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫‪(٣‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻂ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ )ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻗﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪(٣‬‬
‫ﻛﺴﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﺭ ﻭﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻔﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪(٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻪ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻬﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪(٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻻ ﻳﹸﻔﺼﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﹰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻗﺒﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ .LCD‬ﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺨﺪﺷﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺎﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻂ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫… ﺍﻟﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ AM‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻔﺬ ”ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ“ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫‪(١‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻌﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﻌﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺼﺪﻉ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪(٢‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ )ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ( ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺤﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ‬
‫‪(٣‬‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺗﺴﺦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻈﻔﻪ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻝ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪(٤‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺼﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪(٥‬‬
‫‪(٦‬‬
‫‪(٧‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬

‫ﺇﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Toshiba‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺍﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻻﺯﻝ‪… ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮﺀ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Toshiba‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺭﺋﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺴﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪… ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Toshiba‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Toshiba‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬

‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ (AAA) R03‬ﺑﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ‪ TOSHIBA‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫–‪ +/‬ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ –‪ +/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪IN‬‬

‫‪OUT‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﹸﻤﻨﻊ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻌﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﹰﺎ ﺧﻠﻂ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﻤﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬

‫‪٨‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬

‫‪) o HDMI 2‬ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻞ( ‪ −‬ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ) HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫) ”ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ“ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(٤٦ –٢٩‬‬
‫• ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‪.‬‬

‫‪LAN‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪PC/HDMI 1‬‬ ‫‪Y‬‬
‫)‪(AUDIO‬‬
‫‪L/‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬ ‫‪MONO‬‬

‫‪PR/CR‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪RGB/PC‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪L/‬‬
‫‪MONO‬‬

‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬

‫‪R‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT/‬‬
‫‪VIDEO INPUT‬‬ ‫)‪AUDIO(FIXED‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬

‫! )ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ‪ −‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫‪) A ٧‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ( ‪ −‬ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨‬‬
‫! )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ‪ −‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ − LAN‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٣‬‬
‫‪.(١١‬‬
‫‪) o (2) ٩‬ﻃﺮﻓﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪ −‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪) 2 – +‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ‪ −‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫‪) u U‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ( ‪ −‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪) O AUDIO ١٠‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ( ‪ −‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )‪(FIXED‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫‪) p / o‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ‪ −‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪) o (1) COMPONENT / VIDEO INPUT ١١‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ( ‪ −‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪) USB 1-2‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ( ‪ −‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪) USB‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺮﻛﺐ( ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤١‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ‪ USB HDD‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪.USB 2‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ”ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪) “TOSHIBA‬ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ : WLM-40U‬ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٤‬‬

‫‪٩‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬

‫‪) o RGB/PC ١٤‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ( ‪ −‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣١‬‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ )‪) (PC‬‬
‫‪) (AUDIO) o PC/HDMI 1 ١٥‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ‪ −‬ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪) o HDMI 1 ١٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻞ( ‪ −‬ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ) HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫‪) O DIGITAL AUDIO ١٣‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ( )ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ( ‪ −‬ﹸﻣﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٩‬‬

‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ )‪ VIDEO ،TV‬ﺃﻭ ‪(PC ،HDMI ،COMPONENT‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪(0-9‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪) – +‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪u U‬‬ ‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪١٦‬‬
‫• ‪ Menu‬‬ ‫‪١٧‬‬
‫• ‪OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬ ‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ )ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )‬ ‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪(Z z‬‬
‫(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ )‬

‫‪١٠‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻭﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Intelligent AutoView‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Intelligent AutoView‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ! ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ! ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ! ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﹰ ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ”‪) “A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.(٥١ ،١٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ! ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺎﺯﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ ﹰﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻴﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻏﻴﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬

‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) PIN‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ(‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪LAN‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٥‬‬ ‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٣‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.PIN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪TOSHIBA‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ :WLM-40U‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ) USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٩‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ،PIN‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ .PIN‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٦‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ )‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،TOSHIBA‬ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٧‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :TKIP/AES ،AES -‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ASCII 63‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 64‬ﺣﺮﻓﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻴﺎ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪:(WEP‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ASCII 13‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 26‬ﺣﺮﻓﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﹸﻣﻌﺮﱢﻑ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺿﻐﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪.WEP‬‬ ‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.PBC‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﻤﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.OK‬‬

‫‪١٢‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٦‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DHCP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪) .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ ﹰ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ WPA2/WPA-PSK‬ﺃﻭ ‪.WPA2-PSK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺃﻭ ‪ WEP‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AES‬ﺃﻭ ‪.AES/TKIP‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻯ ‪ WEP‬ﻭﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ WEP‬ﻭﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DHCP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،WPA2/WPA-PSK‬ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ AES‬ﺃﻭ ‪.AES/TKIP‬‬
‫‪ IP Address‬ﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ( ‪ DNS‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،WPA2-PSK‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻯ ‪.AES‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،OK‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﹸﻣﻌﺮﱢﻑ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪.WEP‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﹰ‬ ‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬

‫‪١٣‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬

‫‪ .G‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﹸ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .H‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .I‬ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ‪ /‬ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪ .J‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (٢‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ (١‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .A‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥١‬‬ ‫‪ .B‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( )‬
‫ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .C‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ(‪،PAL : P ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ NTSC 4.43 : N4 ،SECAM : S‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ )ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ NTSC 3.58 : N3‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ )ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹼﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ )‪ ،(A‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ”‪ ) “M‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٥١‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻧ ﹰﺎ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺳﻴ ﹰﺌﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﺧﺮ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .D‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ”‪“8‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ”(“‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ﹴﺬ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ PU‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Pu‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ”‪“8‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .E‬ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .F‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٤‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MENU‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ o1‬ﻭ ‪ o2‬ﻭ‪ ،(HDMI‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ EXIT‬ﺃﻭ ‪.MENU‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.BACK‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ PC‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ”ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪) “TOSHIBA‬ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ :WLM-40U‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ Screen Mirroring‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٠‬‬

‫‪١٥‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬

‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ QUICK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤١‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٠‬‬ ‫‪YouTube‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٠‬‬ ‫*‪Screen Mirroring‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٤‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٤‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،١٠‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ٠‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٢‬‬ ‫‪Device Information‬‬

‫‪ ٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ PU‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Pu‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.٤٦ ،٤٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ*‬

‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ*‬

‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ) Screen Mirroring‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٤٠‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٣٧‬ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٤١‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ”ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪) “TOSHIBA‬ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ : WLM-40U‬ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١٦‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬

‫ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪) ABCD‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ (١‬ﺑﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪) MNOP‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪:(٤‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﻪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ،ABCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪.(0-9‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ ،“٤‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ،MNOP‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ ،“١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬

‫‪١٧‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪PC‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ RGB/PC‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺳﺘﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ RGB/PC‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) 16:9‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪ 16:9‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 14:9‬ﺃﻭ ‪… 20:9‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ”ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ“ ﻫﻮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﹰﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪4:3‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻭ ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺚ ‪ 4:3‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ )ﺃﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪(VGA‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 4:3‬ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬

‫ﺃﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﺭﺓ ‪ 21:9‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬

‫‪١٨‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬

‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﻣﺜﹰﻼ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺴﺎﺥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،RGB/PC‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ PC‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ RGB/PC‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ“‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ”ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞﹰ ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛﹰﺎ ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻟﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Intelligent AutoView‬ﻭﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ ،Eco‬ﻭﻛﺮﻳﻜﺖ‪/‬ﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭ‪ PC‬ﻭﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪q‬‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪١٩‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Turbo LED‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ Turbo LED‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Turbo LED‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Detail Booster‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪ Detail Booster‬ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻣﻌﺰﱢﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )‪(NR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ MPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻌﻮﺿﺔ )ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪،Detail Booster‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺰﱢﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ،Auto Clean 2‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﺎ ‪ MPEG‬ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ MPEG‬ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ :‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻣﺨﻀﺮ ﹼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪.3D‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٢٠‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) MTS‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،OK‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ MTS‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬

‫ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،MTS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،3D‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻷﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ MTS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻪ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ MTS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪e‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪ 1-‬ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪2-‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻭﺭﻙ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪ 1-‬ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،2-‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪ 1-‬ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪.2-‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ MTS‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﹰ ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٢١‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ d‬ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬

‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ s‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻭ ‪ e‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ j‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ s‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪ NICAM :‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺚ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻲ ‪ /‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺚ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻲ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪NICAM‬‬

‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ‪I‬‬ ‫‪ j‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪1-‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ‪II‬‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪2-‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪ e‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺿﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻤﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ e‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ 2-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ e‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ s‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ e‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ 1-‬ﻭ ‪ e‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ 2-‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺚ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ e‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.2-‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٢٢‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬

‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȝǾƬƱƓȚ‬‬
‫‪ǀƳƃƪŽȚǓƃǤ‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ǠǣƾƲƴů‬‬ ‫‪ǁƉƳƄƸƴƸů‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ǁƉƳƄƸƴƸƄŽȚǀưŽ‬‬
‫‪ȯƾƲƁȘ‬‬ ‫‪ǀŲǞƴŽȚȲƾƱŻȚ‬‬
‫‪ȩǍƯŽȚǀŵƾŵȝȚȢȚNjŸȘ‬‬
‫‪ȴǞƁǎƱƴƄŽȚǀƴǧȶ‬‬
‫‪ǀŻƾƭŽȚǍƸźǞůȝȚȢȚNjŸȘ‬‬
‫‪ǚƸưƪů‬‬ ‫‪ȔƾŻȤǎŽȚǀŵƾƪŽȚ‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪.PCM‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪.Dolby Digital‬‬
‫• ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪) Digital‬ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ (Dolby Digital‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪) PCM‬ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ (PCM‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : PCM‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ،MPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ“‬
‫‪) PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ( ﻭﺧﺮﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ ‪ ATV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٢٣‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬

‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻔﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺀ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﻴﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪ (0-9‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﺻﻔﺎﺭﺍ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﹰ ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻀﻴﻔﹰ ﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ TV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EXT 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EXT 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(PC‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺘﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ‪4:3‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻋﺎ ‪ ،4:3‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ 4:3‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.4:3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٢٤‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻫﻮ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺑﺪﺧﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺬﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١١‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪PIN‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ”ﺍﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.EXIT‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ )ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ --‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ‪ PC‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﺎﻻﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،VCR‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .LIST‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ o‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪o‬‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ p / o‬ﻭ ‪ U‬ﺃﻭ ‪u‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ،COMPONENT/VIDEO INPUT ،o (1)) VIDEO 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ ،o (2)) VIDEO 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪،‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪) HDMI2 ،HDMI1‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪،(HDMI‬‬
‫‪ ،RGB/PC o) PC‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪(PC‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﻛ ﱠﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﹸ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ PAL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SECAM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ NTSC4.43‬ﺃﻭ ‪.NTSC3.58‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬

‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻘﺮﺍﺀﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺷﺮﺣﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﹰ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺑﺒﺜﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ٤-١‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻴﻜﺴﺖ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ SUBTITLE‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﻣﻨﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻭﺿﻌﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪ FASTEXT‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﻣﻨﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،PU‬ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺒﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .Pu‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺒﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻭﻻﺋﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ(‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TEXT‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪Spor t‬‬ ‫‪14:57:55‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Football‬‬ ‫‪Baseball‬‬ ‫‪Racing‬‬ ‫‪Swimming‬‬

‫ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺳﺘﻜﺴﺖ ‪ FASTEXT‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻯ ‪ ٤‬ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪:TEXT‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺳﺘﻜﺴﺖ ‪ FASTEXT‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TEXT‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺚ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ )ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ( ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Toshiba‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TEXT‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٧‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻜﺖ‪ .‬ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TEXT‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪TEXT M00‬‬ ‫‪14:58:55‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺜﻪ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪101‬‬ ‫‪102‬‬ ‫‪103‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻫﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 100‬ﻭ‪101‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ 102‬ﻭ‪ ،103‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﻮﻧ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﹰ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ‪ TEXT‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪101‬‬ ‫‪TEXT M00‬‬ ‫‪14:58:59‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪101‬‬ ‫‪102‬‬ ‫‪103‬‬

‫‪21:56:25‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﻳﹸﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﹰ ﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،OK‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TEXT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺚ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬

‫‪٢٨‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ DIGITAL AUDIO‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ AC-3 RF‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﱢ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ Dolby Digital Receiver‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻜﻮﺩﺭ ‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﹺ‬ ‫ﹸﻣ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬

‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ DIGITAL AUDIO‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ OPTICAL‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫• ﱢ‬ ‫‪PB/CB‬‬

‫‪L/‬‬
‫‪MONO‬‬

‫ﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﹺ‬ ‫ﹸﻣ‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪PR/CR‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﹰ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪L/‬‬
‫‪MONO‬‬

‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬

‫• ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬

‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪COMPONENT/‬‬

‫‪VIDEO INPUT‬‬ ‫)‪AUDIO(FIXED‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻤﻌﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺎﺑﺎ ﺑﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﹸﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪) AV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(DIGITAL AUDIO‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ‪ ،Dolby Digital‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ PCM‬ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻔﺊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٢٣‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻜ ﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻤﻌﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺎﺑﺎ ﺑﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ DVD‬ﻭﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛﹰﺎ ﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻜﻮﺩﺭ ‪Dolby Digital‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ )‪ Y‬ﻭ ‪ PB/CB‬ﻭ ‪ (PR/CR‬ﻭﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ‪ COMPONENT VIDEO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ ،COMPONENT / VIDEO INPUT‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.COMPONENT‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪o (1) COMPONENT / VIDEO INPUT‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬

‫‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪Y‬‬

‫‪PB/CB‬‬ ‫‪PB/CB‬‬

‫‪PR/CR‬‬ ‫‪PR/CR‬‬

‫‪L/‬‬ ‫‪L/‬‬
‫‪MONO‬‬ ‫‪MONO‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬

‫‪AUDIO‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪ Dolby Digital‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ .Dolby Digital‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٣‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT/‬‬
‫‪VIDEO INPUT‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT/‬‬
‫‪VIDEO INPUT‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫‪٢٩‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫• ‪ :HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺪﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﺑﺼﺮﻱ(‬
‫• ‪ :HDCP‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ CEA-861-D‬ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻧﺎﺷﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪ VESA :S-VGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٦٠٠ 5 ٨٠٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٧٢/٦٠/٥٦‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ‪ VESA :XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ 5 ١٠٢٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٧٠/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ‪ VESA :W-XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ 5 ١٢٨٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫• ‪ VESA :W-XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ 5 ١٣٦٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬

‫• ‪ VESA :S-XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ١٠٢٤ 5 ١٢٨٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬

‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﺎ ﹰ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S-XGA‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ؛ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺪﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﺑﺼﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﻭﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫• ‪ L-PCM‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ PCM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ‪ ،L-PCM‬ﻭ ‪ ،Dolby Digital‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫‪ ٤٨/٤٤٫١/٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪DVI‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪) HDMI‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(A‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.DVI‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVI‬ﺃﻭﻻﹰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺗﹸﻀﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ‪ L-PCM‬ﻭ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ ٤٨/٤٤٫١/٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ ،HDMI‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ ،HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ HDMI 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪DVI‬‬
‫‪VIDE O‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪HD MI OU T‬‬

‫‪OUT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.DVI‬‬
‫ﺻﻤﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ HDCP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪) CEA-861-D‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻊ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪.(DVI‬‬
‫ﹸﺻﻤﻢ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪) 1080i‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻭ‪) 1080p‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠/٢٤‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ 480i‬ﻭ‪ 480p‬ﻭ‪ 576i‬ﻭ‪ 576p‬ﻭ‪) 720p‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﹰ‬
‫‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪) VGA‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ VESA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ ٧٥/٧٢/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٠‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪HDMI 1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪DVI‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVI‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ PC/HDMI 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪.HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ (A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ DVI‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﹺ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) HDMI‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ - (A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪DVI‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ DVI‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ؛ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ DVI‬ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪PC/HDMI 1‬‬
‫)‪(AUDIO‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﻤﺪﺧﻞ ‪ RGB/PC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﻴﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ RGB‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺑﻮﺱ(‪.‬‬

‫‪PC/HDMI 1‬‬
‫)‪(AUDIO‬‬

‫‪RGB/PC‬‬ ‫‪DVI‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬

‫‪OUT‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪PC/HDMI 1‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪ ،PC‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ PC‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪ o RGB/PC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ VESA :VGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٧٢/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ VESA :S-VGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٧٢/٦٠/٥٦‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ VESA :XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٧٠/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ،PC/HDMI 1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ PC‬ﺃﻭ ‪.HDMI1‬‬
‫‪ VESA :W-XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ :W-XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ VESA :W-XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ × ١٣٦٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ :W-XGA+‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٩٠٠ × ١٤٤٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ VESA :S-XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ p١٠٨٠ × ١٩٢٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪٦٧٫٥ :‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ ،(H‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ١٤٨٫٥ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬

‫‪٣١‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺑﻮﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪D-sub‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬

‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺫﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺑﻮﺳﺎ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪.DOS/V‬‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ D-sub‬ﻣﺼﻐﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺑﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺑﻮﺱ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫‪NC‬‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺩﻟﻴﻼ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪NC‬‬ ‫‪١١‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.PC‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪DDC‬‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ(‬
‫ﱠ‬ ‫‪) NC‬ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD-Video‬ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫‪) H-sync‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ(‬ ‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) V-sync‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪١٤‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪DDC‬‬ ‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﻤﺪﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﻴﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﻤﺪﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ DVI‬ﻭﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﻤﺪﺧﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ (A‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺃﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ o‬ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻭ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪PC‬‬ ‫‪PC/HDMI 1‬‬
‫)‪(AUDIO‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.PC‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.PC‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺫﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٢‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ LAN‬ﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ Toshiba‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﹼﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،PC‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DHCP‬ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓﹰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﺔ ‪.LAN‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،PC‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ PC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،PC‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫] ‪[ȉ ] [Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪ PC‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻳﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬

‫]‪ [١‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺘﺤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ )ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ(‬

‫]‪ [٢‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ LAN‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫]‪ [٣‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓﹰ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٣‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﹰ‬

‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ™‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ™‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪) TOSHIBA‬ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ :WLM-40U‬ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﹰ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻛﻬﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫™‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻠﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻭﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻳﻘﻞ ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻯ ‪ TOSHIBA‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻟﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺠﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﺜﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﹸﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﹸﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٫١٥‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٫٣٥‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻳﹸﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺿﺎﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﺘﺄﻛ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﺢ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻤﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ TOSHIBA‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )‪/(DSSS‬ﺗﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ )‪ ،(OFDM‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻊ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﹸﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ IEEE 802.11‬ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٫١٥‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٫٣٥‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،(n/g/b/a‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﹸﻣﻌﺮﱠﻑ ﻭﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺪ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻤﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫• ﹸ‬
‫‪ TOSHIBA‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﻫﻮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﺭﻳﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ TOSHIBA‬ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٤‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﹶ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺿﻐﻂ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.PBC‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ“‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٧‬‬ ‫)‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ BACK‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) PIN‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﺰﻉ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )‪ (AP‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻔﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.PIN‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ‪ ٣‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ )‪ PBC‬ﺃﻭ ‪(PIN‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ ،WPS‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪.OK‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ WPS‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ‪ WPS‬ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ WEP‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٥‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ،PIN‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.PIN‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻻﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ BACK‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ‪ WPA2/WPA-PSK‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪.OK‬‬
‫‪.WPA2-PSK‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺃﻭ ‪ WEP‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AES‬ﺃﻭ ‪.AES/TKIP‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻮﺛﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺳﻮﻯ ‪WEP‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ WEP‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺷﻲﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،WPA2/WPA-PSK‬ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ AES‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪.AES/TKIP‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،WPA2-PSK‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺳﻮﻯ ‪.AES‬‬ ‫‪) TKIP -‬ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ(‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﹸﻣﻌﺮﱢﻑ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪) AES/‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ(‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 63 ASCII‬ﺃﻭ ‪64‬‬
‫‪.WEP‬‬ ‫ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻴﺎ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻓﹰﺎ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪ 5 :(WEP‬ﺃﻭ ‪13‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻴﺎ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ ASCII‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 26‬ﺣﺮﻓﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﹸﻣﻌﺮﱢﻑ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٩‬‬ ‫‪.WEP‬‬

‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﻤﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻤﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ BACK‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ BACK‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٦‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ AP‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ IEEE 802.11n‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ WEP‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .AES/TKIP‬ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) AES‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ“‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ QUICK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ‪ IEEE 802.11‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬
‫ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ IEEE 802.11a‬ﺃﻭ ‪ IEEE 802.11n‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ‪٥‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.SD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ IEEE 802.11n‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٥‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.HD‬‬
‫ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﻓﻖ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﻗﻮﻱ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪/‬ﺿﻌﻴﻒ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DHCP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ )‪(11n ،11g ،11b ،11a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪) .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ ﹰ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪SSID‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DHCP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP Address‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪IP Address‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC Address‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪AP MAC‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC Address‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪TV MAC‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،IP Address‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪ Enabled‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.DHCP‬‬
‫‪ Disabled‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.DHCP‬‬
‫‪DHCP‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪IP Address‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪Subnet Mask‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪DNS‬‬ ‫‪DNS‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٧‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،DNS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،IP Address‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ DNS‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.IP Address‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ DNS‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ .IP‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ DNS‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﻭ‪ .٢٥٥‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺣﻘﻞ ‪ IP Address‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﻭ‪ .٢٥٥‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP Address‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ DNS‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Subnet Mask‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ DNS‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.IP Address‬‬
‫‪MAC Address‬‬ ‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.IP Address‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪ IP address‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ IP address‬ﻷﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ IP address‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﹰ‬
‫‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪DNS‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،MAC Address‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،DNS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٨‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،BACK‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪    ‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫‪BACK‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EXIT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،OK‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،OK‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ “‪.“٠٠٠٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ “‪.“٠٠٠٠‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Screen Mirroring‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪) TOSHIBA‬ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ :WLM-40U‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،Screen Mirroring‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫• ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ QUICK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ )‪ :WLM-40U‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.Screen Mirroring‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Screen Mirroring‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ”ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ‪:PBC‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،Screen Mirroring‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ‪:PIN‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ Toshiba‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ“‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،Screen Mirroring‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪YouTube‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪.YouTube‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪.YouTube‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ YouTube‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺎ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﱢﻡ ‪ Toshiba‬ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻐﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺣﻈﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﹰﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪) CSP‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺰﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬

‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Screen Mirroring‬ﻧﺸﻄﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ‪:Screen Mirroring‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ EXIT‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪Screen Mirroring‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪USB2.0 HS :‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Screen Mirroring‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻓﺌﺔ )‪Mass Storage Class (MSC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪Screen Mirroring‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.USB HDD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.Screen Mirroring‬‬
‫• ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ QUICK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ FAT16 :‬ﻭ ‪FAT32‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺫﻭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ TOSHIBA‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﻨﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺫﻥ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Media Player‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﹸ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺜﺒ ﹰﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤١‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﹼ ﺮﺓ ﻏﺮﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪:‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺪﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ Pu / PU‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ BACK‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.BACK‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ QUICK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Device Information‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.EXIT‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬

‫‪٤٢‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ QUICK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪15‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ Pu / PU‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 90‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ BACK‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) RED‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪x8 s x4 s x2 s x1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) GREEN‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ v‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪x1 s x2 s x4 s x8‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ :BACK‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ :  ‬ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،v‬ﻓﺴﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ W‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.EXIT‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ cc‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CC‬ﺃﻭ ‪.cc‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٣‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ®‪:DivX‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬

‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﹰ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﺍﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺟﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ )‪ (VOD‬ﻣﻦ ®‪ .DivX‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX® VOD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﹸ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (cc / CC‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،DivX® VOD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ s‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ DivX® VOD Registration‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﹰ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ DivX® VOD‬ﻭﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ®‪ DivX‬ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫‪.http://vod.divx.com‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ QUICK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،DivX® VOD Deregistration‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ DivX® VOD‬ﻭﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ..‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ®‪ DivX‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪http://vod.divx.com‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.BACK‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX® :DIVX‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ LLC ،DivX‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ .Rovi Corporation‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫®‪ DivX Certified‬ﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺟﺘﺎﺯ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﺎﺭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ v‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .DivX‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪ divx.com‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ .“Resume Play‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪.DivX‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DivX VOD‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ®‪ DivX Certified‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ DivX VOD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﺍﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪،‬‬
‫‪ DivX VOD‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪vod.divx.com‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ® ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪ DivX‬ﻭ‪) DivX Plus® HD‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ (H.264/MKV‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،1080p HD‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.EXIT‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٧‬‬

‫‪٤٤‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ Pu / PU‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ BACK‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﺃﻭ ‪) c‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ v‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ W‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) c‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ cc‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CC‬ﺃﻭ ‪.cc‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ‪ DivX Plus‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ cc‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CC‬ﺃﻭ ‪.cc‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪٪ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﻓﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫”ﻧﻌﻢ“‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Z‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ ،١‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪،٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺄﺟﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Z‬ﺃﻭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (cc / CC‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX Plus‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ‪ TOSHIBA‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ QUICK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.BACK‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﹰ‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.EXIT‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٨‬‬

‫‪٤٦‬‬
 ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ JPEG Exif :‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪٢٫١‬‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫‪.jpg‬‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ٤٠٩٦ :‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪.jpeg‬‬

‫*( ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪PNG‬‬ ‫‪.png‬‬ ‫‪PNG‬‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫‪BMP‬‬ ‫‪.bmp‬‬ ‫‪BMP‬‬

‫ﺍﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ٤٠٩٦ :‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫)‪H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪.avi‬‬ ‫‪AVI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫‪DivX 3, 4, 5‬‬
‫‪١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬ ‫‪Xvid‬‬
‫‪MJPEG‬‬
‫*( ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-1/2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ(‬
‫‪ MPEG-1/2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪٣‬‬
‫)‪Dolby Digital (AC-3‬‬
‫‪L-PCM‬‬
‫‪ADPCM‬‬
‫‪WMA7/8/9 Std‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-1‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪.mpg‬‬ ‫‪MPEG-2‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ MPEG-2‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.mpeg‬‬ ‫‪PS‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-1/2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ(‬ ‫‪.dat‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-1/2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪٣‬‬
‫)‪Dolby Digital (AC-3‬‬
‫‪L-PCM‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-2‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪.ts‬‬ ‫‪MPEG-2‬‬
‫)‪H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC‬‬ ‫‪.trp‬‬ ‫‪TS‬‬
‫)‪VC-1 (WMV9‬‬ ‫‪.tp‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-1/2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ(‬ ‫‪.m2ts‬‬
‫)‪Dolby Digital (AC-3‬‬
‫‪L-PCM‬‬

‫‪٤٧‬‬
 ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬

‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬/‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬MPEG-2 (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .vob MPEG-2
٢ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ VOB
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
L-PCM
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .mov MOV
٢ ‫ ﺟﺰﺀ‬MPEG-4
MJPEG
٣ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 Audio (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .mp4 MP4
٣ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 Audio (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ .m4v
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
٢ ‫ ﺟﺰﺀ‬MPEG-4 (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .asf ASF
VC-1 (WMV9) .wmv
ADPCM (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ .xvid
WMA7/8/9 Std
DivX 5 (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .divx DivX
٣ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 Audio (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ .div
Dolby Digital (AC-3) ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬MPEG-2 (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .mkv MKV
٢ ‫ ﺟﺰﺀ‬MPEG-4 .xdiv
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
Xvid
٢ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
٣ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
RealVideo 8, 9, 10 (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .rm RealMedia
RA-COOK (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ .rmvb
Sorenson H.263 (FLV1) (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .flv Flash
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) Video
٣ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 Audio (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ (FLV1)
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
٢ ‫ ﺟﺰﺀ‬MPEG-4 (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .3gp 3GPP
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
MPEG-4 LC AAC (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬٤٠٩٦ :‫ﺍﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ٣ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 .mp3 MP3
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC .mp4 MP4
.m4a
WMA7/8/9 Std .wma WMA
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
L-PCM .wav WAV
ADPCM
٢-‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 .mka MKA
٣-‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2

٤٨
 ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬

[‫ ]ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬RF ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ [‫ ]ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬RF ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ C ‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
OSD OSD
161.25 S9 663.25 C45 [‫ ]ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬RF ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ OSD
168.25 S10 671.25 C46 44.25 C1
231.25 S11 679.25 C47 48.25 C2
238.25 S13 687.25 C48 55.25 C3
245.25 S14 695.25 C49 62.25 C4
252.25 S15 703.25 C50 175.25 C5
259.25 S16 711.25 C51 182.25 C6
266.25 S17 719.25 C52 189.25 C7
273.25 S18 727.25 C53 196.25 C8
280.25 S19 735.25 C54 203.25 C9
287.25 S20 743.25 C55 210.25 C10
294.25 S21 751.25 C56 217.25 C11
303.25 S22 759.25 C57 224.25 C12
311.25 S23 767.25 C58 471.25 C21
319.25 S24 775.25 C59 479.25 C22
327.25 S25 783.25 C60 487.25 C23
335.25 S26 791.25 C61 495.25 C24
343.25 S27 799.25 C62 503.25 C25
351.25 S28 807.25 C63 511.25 C26
359.25 S29 815.25 C64 519.25 C27
367.25 S30 823.25 C65 527.25 C28
375.25 S31 831.25 C66 535.25 C29
383.25 S32 839.25 C67 543.25 C30
391.25 S33 847.25 C68 551.25 C31
399.25 S34 855.25 C69 559.25 C32
407.25 S35 863.25 C70 567.25 C33
415.25 S36 575.25 C34
431.25 S37 S ‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬ 583.25 C35
439.25 S38 [‫ ]ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬RF ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ OSD 591.25 C36
447.25 S39 599.25 C37
105.25 S1
455.25 S40 607.25 C38
112.25 S2
463.25 S41 615.25 C39
119.25 S3
69.25 S51 623.25 C40
126.25 S4
76.25 S52 631.25 C41
133.25 S5
83.25 S53 639.25 C42
140.25 S6
90.25 S54 647.25 C43
147.25 S7
97.25 S55 655.25 C44
154.25 S8

٤٩
 ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻱ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬

‫• ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺒﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻂ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.1‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺐ ﺑﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺭﺩﻱﺀ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻻﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ + 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ −‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺐ ﺑﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺐ ﺑﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺭﺩﻱﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬

‫• ﺃﺯﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺐ ﺑﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺐ ﺑﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﺩﻱﺀ ﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺐ ﺑﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺚ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪:PIN‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ Master PIN‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ (١٢٧٦‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٠‬‬
 ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﺚ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪،32L3300‬‬ ‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪39L3300‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪B/G‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺮﺍﺋﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠ - ١١٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ ٦٠ / ٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻦ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‪...‬‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٧٩ :‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪ ٠٫٤ ،‬ﻭﺍﻁ )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ١٢٣ :‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪ ٠٫٤ ،‬ﻭﺍﻁ )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫‪D/K‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻨﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮﻧﻎ ﻛﻮﻧﻎ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٧٣٦ :‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪ ٥٠٤‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪ ١٨٠‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪B/G‬‬ ‫‪SECAM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٣٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ٨٩١ :‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪ ٥٩٠‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪ ١٨٠‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ(‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٦٫٥ :‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪D/K‬‬ ‫‪SECAM‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬
‫‪ ٣٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ٨٫٥ :‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪NTSC‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻨﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﻴﻦ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ )ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺎﻧﻮﺳﻴﺎ‬
‫‪2 - 12‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫)‪(CCIR‬‬ ‫‪B/G‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫‪21 - 69‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬
‫‪S1 - S41 ،X - Z+2‬‬ ‫‪CATV‬‬ ‫‪B/G‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫)‪(UK‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪21 - 69‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪CATV‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬
‫‪1 - 12‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫)‪(CHINA‬‬ ‫‪D/K‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪13 - 57‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫‪Z1 - Z38‬‬ ‫‪CATV‬‬
‫‪2 - 12‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫)‪(CCIR‬‬ ‫‪B/G‬‬ ‫‪SECAM‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬
‫‪21 - 69‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬
‫‪S1 - S41 ،X - Z+2‬‬ ‫‪CATV‬‬
‫‪1 - 12‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫)‪(OIRT‬‬ ‫‪D/K‬‬ ‫‪SECAM‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪21 - 69‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬
‫‪X1 - X19‬‬ ‫‪CATV‬‬
‫‪2 - 13‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫)‪(US‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪NTSC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫‪14 - 79‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬
‫‪،AA - ZZ ،A - W ،A6 - A1‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﺯﻳﻞ‬
‫‪CATV‬‬
‫‪BBB ،AAA‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪NTSC‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﻟﻮﻣﺒﻴﺎﺕ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬
‫‪1 - 12‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫)‪(JAPAN‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪NTSC‬‬
‫‪13 - 62‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬
‫‪S1 - S41 ،M1 - M10‬‬ ‫‪CATV‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ RF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ PAL‬ﻭ‪ SECAM‬ﻭ‪ NTSC‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) ٣٫٥٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪NTSC 4.43‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ٦٫٥/٦٫٠/٥٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ NTSC‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) ٤٫٤٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪PAL 60‬‬ ‫ﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪.PAL‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ NTSC‬ﻣﺴ ﱠ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ٦٫٥/٦٫٠/٥٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ‪) COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪ ،480i‬ﻭ‪ ،480p‬ﻭ‪ ،576i‬ﻭ‪ ،576p‬ﻭ‪ ٦٠/٥٠) 720p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪٦٠/٥٠) 1080i ،‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ‪(.LCD‬‬

‫‪٥١‬‬
 ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ‪ VIDEO INPUT‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ )‪ ،(١‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ ،(١‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )‪ ،(٢‬ﺑﺮﻏﻲ )‪(١‬‬ ‫‪ PAL‬ﻭ‪ SECAM‬ﻭ‪NTSC 3.58/4.43‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٤‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ )‪ ،(١‬ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ )‪(M٤ × ٤ ،M٥ × ٢‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣‬‬ ‫‪16 : 9‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿ ﹰﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ )ﻗﻄﺮﻱ(‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻻﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٨٠٫٠ :‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ٩٧٫٩ :‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ١٣٦٦ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﺍﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ ٧٦٨‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪ ٣٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ١٩٢٠ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ ١٠٨٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ١٠ +‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ١٢٠ 5 ٤٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻓﺎ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫)‪o (1‬‬
‫‪V‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪COMPONENT /‬‬
‫‪PR/CR ،PB/CB ،Y‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪VIDEO INPUT‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ / L‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪+R‬‬
‫‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫)‪o (2‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪VIDEO INPUT‬‬
‫‪ O DIGITAL AUDIO‬ﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪PCM/‬‬ ‫)ﺿﻮﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪ / Audio L‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪R ،‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ‬ ‫‪O AUDIO‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫)‪(FIXED‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪o RGB/PC‬‬
‫‪Mini D-sub 15 pin Analogue RGB‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪o PC/HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫)‪(AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ )ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(A‬‬ ‫‪o HDMI1-2‬‬
‫‪ A/V‬ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ ١٩‬ﺳﻨﹰﺎ‬
‫)‪HDMI (Lip Sync‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ١-٢‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪USB 2.0‬‬
‫ﻓﺌﺔ ‪Mass Storage :USB‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ FAT16 :‬ﻭ ‪FAT32‬‬
‫‪RJ-45‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪LAN‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ‪ ٣٥ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) ٪٨٠ - ٪٢٠‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ(‬

‫‪٥٢‬‬
 ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬

‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪MPEG-4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ VISUAL‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺑﻐﺮﺽ )‪ (١‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪MPEG-4 VISUAL‬‬ ‫ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫)‪ STANDARD (MPEG-4 VIDEO‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (٢‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ‬ ‫‪ HDMI Licensing LLC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪MPEG-4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Dolby‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻌﺪ ‪ Dolby‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫‪ VIDEO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ .MPEG LA‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺘﺪ ﺃﻱ ﹴﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪.Laboratories‬‬
‫ﻷﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫®‪ DivX‬ﻭ®‪ DivX Certified‬ﻭ‪ DivX Plus® HD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Rovi Corporation‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.MPEG LA، L.L.C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ!‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪HTTP://WWW. MPEGLA. COM‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪• This product contains technology subject to certain‬‬ ‫‪7,295,673‬؛ ‪7,460,668‬؛ ‪7,515,710‬؛ ‪7,519,274‬‬
‫‪intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪AVC‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪of this technology outside of this product is prohibited‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ )‪ (١‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ‬
‫‪without the appropriate license(s) from Microsoft.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ ) AVC‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ (AVC‬ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (٢‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ‬
‫‪• This product includes technology owned by Microsoft‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ AVC‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪Corporation and can not be used or distributed without a‬‬ ‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻪ‬
‫‪license from Microsoft Licensing, GP.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .AVC‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺘﺪ ﺃﻱ ﹴﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻷﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.MPEG LA ،L.L.C‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ ،3 -MPEG Layer‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻲ ‪ ،Fraunhofer LLS‬ﻭ ‪.Thomson‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪VC-1‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ )‪ (١‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪) VC-1‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ (VC-1‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (٢‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VC-1‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .VC-1‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺘﺪ ﺃﻱ ﹴﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻷﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.MPEG LA ،L.L.C‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬

‫‪٥٣‬‬
٥٤
٥٥